texlive[52222] Master/texmf-dist: beamer (30sep19)
commits+karl at tug.org
commits+karl at tug.org
Mon Sep 30 23:49:04 CEST 2019
Revision: 52222
http://tug.org/svn/texlive?view=revision&revision=52222
Author: karl
Date: 2019-09-30 23:49:03 +0200 (Mon, 30 Sep 2019)
Log Message:
-----------
beamer (30sep19)
Modified Paths:
--------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty
Added Paths:
-----------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex
Removed Paths:
-------------
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex
trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/CHANGELOG.md 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -8,6 +8,17 @@
## [Unreleased]
+## [v3.57]
+
+### Changed
+
+- More patch for `paralist` package (see #539)
+
+### Fixed
+
+- Replace `\mode` with `\only` (see #543)
+- Reset the width of color box in case of change in `\hsize`
+
## [v3.56]
### Changed
@@ -70,9 +81,10 @@
- Support for `noxcolor` with `beamerarticle` (see #483)
- Treatment of mixed overlay/alert specifications
-[Unreleased]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.56...HEAD
+[Unreleased]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.57...HEAD
+[v3.57]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.56...v3.57
+[v3.56]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.55...v3.56
[v3.55]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.54...v3.55
-[v3.55]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.55...v3.56
[v3.54]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.53...v3.54
[v3.53]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.52...v3.53
[v3.52]: https://github.com/josephwright/beamer/compare/v3.51...v3.52
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,744 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified
-%
-% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
-% 2. under the GNU Public License.
-%
-% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
-
-
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-%
-% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS\xA1!!
-%
-% Use a file in the directory solutions instead.
-% They are much better suited.
-%
-
-
-% Setup appearance:
-
-\usetheme{Darmstadt}
-\usefonttheme[onlylarge]{structurebold}
-\setbeamerfont*{frametitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\bfseries}
-\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{}
-
-
-% Standard packages
-
-\usepackage[english]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-
-
-% Setup TikZ
-
-\usepackage{tikz}
-\usetikzlibrary{arrows}
-\tikzstyle{block}=[draw opacity=0.7,line width=1.4cm]
-
-
-% Author, Title, etc.
-
-\title[Block Partitioning and Perfect Phylogenies]
-{%
- On the Complexity of SNP Block Partitioning Under the Perfect
- Phylogeny Model%
-}
-
-\author[Gramm, Hartman, Nierhoff, Sharan, Tantau]
-{
- Jens~Gramm\inst{1} \and
- Tzvika~Hartman\inst{2} \and
- Till~Nierhoff\inst{3} \and
- Roded~Sharan\inst{4} \and
- \textcolor{green!50!black}{Till~Tantau}\inst{5}
-}
-
-\institute[T\xFCbingen and others]
-{
- \inst{1}%
- Universit\xE4t T\xFCbingen, Germany
- \and
- \vskip-2mm
- \inst{2}%
- Bar-Ilan University, Ramat-Gan, Israel
- \and
- \vskip-2mm
- \inst{3}%
- International Computer Science Institute, Berkeley, USA
- \and
- \vskip-2mm
- \inst{4}%
- Tel-Aviv University, Israel
- \and
- \vskip-2mm
- \inst{5}%
- Universit\xE4t zu L\xFCbeck, Germany
-}
-
-\date[WABI 2006]
-{Workshop on Algorithms in Bioinformatics, 2006}
-
-
-
-% The main document
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \titlepage
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Outline}
- \tableofcontents
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-\subsection{The Model and the Problem}
-
-\begin{frame}{What is haplotyping and why is it important?}
- You hopefully know this after the previous three talks\dots
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}[t]{General formalization of haplotyping.}
- \begin{block}{Inputs}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item A \alert{genotype matrix} $G$.
- \item The \alert{rows} of the matrix are \alert{taxa / individuals}.
- \item The \alert{columns} of the matrix are \alert{SNP sites /
- characters}.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
- \begin{block}{Outputs}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item A \alert{haplotype matrix} $H$.
- \item Pairs of rows in $H$ \alert{explain} the rows of $G$.
- \item The haplotypes in $H$ are \alert{biologically plausible}.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}[t]{Our formalization of haplotyping.}
- \begin{block}{Inputs}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item A genotype matrix $G$.
- \item The rows of the matrix are individuals / taxa.
- \item The columns of the matrix are SNP sites / characters.
- \item<alert at 1->
- The problem is directed: one haplotype is known.
- \item<alert at 1->
- The input is biallelic: there are only two homozygous
- states (0 and 1) and one heterozygous state (2).
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
- \begin{block}{Outputs}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item A haplotype matrix $H$.
- \item Pairs of rows in $H$ explain the rows of $G$.
- \item<alert at 1> The haplotypes in $H$ form a perfect phylogeny.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{We can do perfect phylogeny haplotyping efficiently, but
- \dots}
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item \alert{Data may be missing.}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item This makes the problem NP-complete \dots
- \item \dots even for very restricted cases.
- \end{itemize}
- \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Additional assumption like the rich data hypothesis.
- \end{itemize}
- \item \alert{No perfect phylogeny is possible.}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item This can be caused by chromosomal crossing-over effects.
- \item This can be caused by incorrect data.
- \item This can be caused by multiple mutations at the same sites.
- \end{itemize}
- \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Look for phylogenetic networks.
- \item Correct data.
- \item<alert at 1->
- Find blocks where a perfect phylogeny is possible.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{The Integrated Approach}
-
-\begin{frame}{How blocks help in perfect phylogeny haplotyping.}
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Partition the site set into overlapping contiguous blocks.
- \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them.
- \item Use dynamic programming for finding the partition.
- \end{enumerate}
-
- \begin{tikzpicture}
- \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2);
-
- \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm]
- (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix}
- (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666)
- (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333)
- (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}};
-
- \begin{scope}[xshift=-.5mm]
- \only<2->
- {
- \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5)
- node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny};
- }
-
- \only<3->
- {
- \draw[green!50!black,block] (2.5,.5) -- (7,.5)
- node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny};
- }
-
- \only<4->
- {
- \draw[blue,block] (6.5,.5) -- (10,.5)
- node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny};
- }
- \end{scope}
- \end{tikzpicture}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Objective of the integrated approach.}
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Partition the site set into \alert{noncontiguous} blocks.
- \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them.
- \item<alert at 1-> Compute partition while computing perfect
- phylogenies.
- \end{enumerate}
-
- \begin{tikzpicture}
- \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2);
-
- \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm]
- (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix}
- (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666)
- (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333)
- (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}};
-
- \only<2->
- {
- \begin{scope}[xshift=-0.5mm]
- \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5)
- node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny}
- (8,.5) -- (9,.5);
-
- \draw[green!50!black,block]
- (3,.5) -- (6,.5)
- node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny}
- (6.4,.5) -- (8,.5)
- (9,.5) -- (10,.5);
-
- \draw[blue,block] (6,.5) -- (6.4,.5)
- node[midway,below=5mm] {perfect phylogeny};
- \end{scope}
- }
- \end{tikzpicture}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{The formal computational problem.}
- We are interested in the computational complexity of \\
- \alert{the function \alert{$\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$}}:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item It gets genotype matrices as input.
- \item It maps them to a number $k$.
- \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be
- covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect phylogeny.
- \\
- (We call this a \alert{pp-partition}.)
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\section{Bad News: Hardness Results}
-
-\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Haplotype Matrices}
-
-\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
- We start with a special case:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{already haplotype matrices}.
- \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}.
- \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$?
- \end{itemize}
- \begin{example}
- \begin{columns}
- \column{.3\textwidth}
- $M\colon$
- \footnotesize
- \begin{tabular}{cccc}
- 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\
- 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\
- 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\
- 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 1 & 0 & 1 \\
- 1 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\
- 1 & 0 & 1 & 0
- \end{tabular}%
- \only<2>
- {%
- \begin{tikzpicture}
- \useasboundingbox (2.9,0);
-
- \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.9) -- (1.7 ,-1.7);
- \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.9) -- (0.85,-1.7)
- (2.55,1.9) -- (2.55,-1.7);
- \end{tikzpicture}
- }
- \column{.6\textwidth}
- \begin{overprint}
- \onslide<1>
- No perfect phylogeny is possible.
-
- \onslide<2>
- \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
-
- \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
-
- $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$.
-
- \end{overprint}
- \end{columns}
- \end{example}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
- \begin{theorem}
- Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of haplotype matrices}\\
- is equivalent to finding \alert{optimal graph colorings}.
- \end{theorem}
-
- \begin{proof}[Proof sketch for first direction]
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Let $G$ be a graph.
- \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$.
- \item For each edge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\the
- submatrix $\left(
- \begin{smallmatrix}
- 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 1 \\
- 1 & 0 \\
- 1 & 1
- \end{smallmatrix}\right)$.
- \item The submatrix enforces that the columns lie in different
- perfect phylogenies. \qedhere
- \end{enumerate}
- \end{proof}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
- \begin{corollary}
- If $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a haplotype matrix $M$,
- we can find an optimal pp-partition in polynomial time.
- \end{corollary}
-
- \begin{corollary}
- Computing $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$ for haplotype matrices is
- \begin{itemize}
- \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard,
- \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless
- $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$,
- \item very hard to approximate.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{corollary}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of genotype matrices.}
- Now comes the general case:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{genotype matrices}.
- \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}.
- \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$?
- \end{itemize}
- \begin{example}
- \begin{columns}
- \column{.3\textwidth}
- $M\colon$
- \footnotesize
- \begin{tabular}{cccc}
- 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\
- 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\
- 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\
- 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 \\
- 1 & 1 & 0 & 0
- \end{tabular}%
- \only<2>
- {%
- \begin{tikzpicture}
- \useasboundingbox (2.9,0);
-
- \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.3) -- (1.7 ,-1.1);
- \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.3) -- (0.85,-1.1)
- (2.55,1.3) -- (2.55,-1.1);
- \end{tikzpicture}
- }
- \column{.6\textwidth}
- \begin{overprint}
- \onslide<1>
- No perfect phylogeny is possible.
-
- \onslide<2>
- \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
-
- \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
-
- $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$.
-
- \end{overprint}
- \end{columns}
- \end{example}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
- \begin{theorem}
- Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of genotype matrices}
- is at least as hard as finding \alert{optimal colorings of
- 3-uniform hypergraphs}.
- \end{theorem}
-
- \begin{proof}[Proof sketch]
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Let $G$ be a 3-uniform hypergraph.
- \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$.
- \item For each hyperedge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\ the submatrix
- $\left(
- \begin{smallmatrix}
- 2 & 2 & 2 \\
- 1 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 1 & 0 \\
- 0 & 0 & 1
- \end{smallmatrix}\right)
- $.
- \item The submatrix enforces that the three columns do not all lie
- in the same perfect phylogeny. \qedhere
- \end{enumerate}
- \end{proof}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of genotype matrices.}
- \begin{corollary}
- Even if we know $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a genotype matrix $M$,\\
- finding a pp-partition of any fixed size is still
- \begin{itemize}
- \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard,
- \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless
- $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$,
- \item very hard to approximate.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{corollary}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\section{Good News: Tractability Results}
-
-\subsection{Perfect Path Phylogenies}
-
-\begin{frame}{Automatic optimal pp-partitioning is hopeless, but\dots}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item The hardness results are \alert{worst-case} results for\\
- \alert{highly artificial inputs}.
- \item \alert{Real biological data} might have special properties
- that make the problem \alert{tractable}.
- \item One such property is that perfect phylogenies are often
- perfect \alert{path} phylogenies:
-
- In HapMap data, in 70\% of the blocks where a perfect phylogeny
- is possible a perfect path phylogeny is also possible.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Example of a perfect path phylogeny.}
- \begin{columns}[t]
- \column{.3\textwidth}
- \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix}
- $G\colon$
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- A & B & C \\\hline
- 2 & 2 & 2 \\
- 0 & 2 & 0 \\
- 2 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 2 & 2
- \end{tabular}
- \end{exampleblock}
-
- \column{.3\textwidth}
- \begin{exampleblock}{Haplotype matrix}
- $H\colon$
- \begin{tabular}{ccc}
- A & B & C \\\hline
- 1 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 1 & 1 \\
- 0 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 1 & 0 \\
- 0 & 0 & 0 \\
- 1 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 0 & 0 \\
- 0 & 1 & 1
- \end{tabular}
- \end{exampleblock}
-
- \column{.4\textwidth}
- \begin{exampleblock}{Perfect path phylogeny}
- \begin{center}
- \begin{tikzpicture}[auto,thick]
- \tikzstyle{node}=%
- [%
- minimum size=10pt,%
- inner sep=0pt,%
- outer sep=0pt,%
- ball color=example text.fg,%
- circle%
- ]
-
- \node [node] {} [->]
- child {node [node] {} edge from parent node[swap]{A}}
- child {node [node] {}
- child {node [node] {} edge from parent node{C}}
- edge from parent node{B}
- };
- \end{tikzpicture}
- \end{center}
- \end{exampleblock}
- \end{columns}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{The modified formal computational problem.}
- We are interested in the computational complexity of \\
- the function $\chi_{\alert{\operatorname{PPP}}}$:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item It gets genotype matrices as input.
- \item It maps them to a number $k$.
- \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be
- covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect \alert{path} phylogeny.
- \\
- (We call this a ppp-partition.)
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\subsection{Tractability of PPP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices}
-
-\begin{frame}{Good news about ppp-partitions of genotype matrices.}
- \begin{theorem}
- \alert{Optimal ppp-partitions of genotype matrices} can be
- computed in \alert{polynomial time}.
- \end{theorem}
- \begin{block}{Algorithm}
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Build the following partial order:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Can one column be above the other in a phylogeny?
- \item Can the columns be the two children of the root of a
- perfect path phylogeny?
- \end{itemize}
- \item Cover the partial order with as few compatible chain pairs
- as possible.
-
- For this, a maximal matching in a special graph needs to be
- computed.
- \end{enumerate}
- \end{block}
- \hyperlink{algorithm<1>}{\beamergotobutton{The algorithm in action}}
- \hypertarget{return}{}
-\end{frame}
-
-\section*{Summary}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \frametitle<presentation>{Summary}
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Finding optimal pp-partitions is \alert{intractable}.
- \item
- It is even intractable to find a pp-partition when \alert{just two
- noncontiguous blocks are known to suffice}.
- \item
- For perfect \alert{path} phylogenies, optimal partitions can be
- computed \alert{in polynomial time}.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\appendix
-
-\section*{Appendix}
-
-\begin{frame}[label=algorithm]{The algorithm in action.}{Computation of
- the partial order.}
- \begin{columns}[t]
- \column{.4\textwidth}
- \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix}
- $G\colon$
- \begin{tabular}{ccccc}
- A & B & C & D & E \\\hline
- 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\
- 0 & 1 & 2 & 1 & 0 \\
- 1 & 0 & 0 & 1 & 2 \\
- 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 & 0
- \end{tabular}
- \end{exampleblock}
- \column{.6\textwidth}
- \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order}
- \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm]
- \tikzstyle{every node}=
- [%
- fill=green!50!black!20,%
- draw=green!50!black,%
- minimum size=7mm,%
- circle,%
- thick%
- ]
-
- \node (A) {A};
- \node (B) [right of=A] {B};
- \node (C) [below of=B] {C};
- \node (D) [above of=A] {D};
- \node (E) [below of=A] {E};
-
- \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E)
- (B) edge (C)
- (D) edge (A)
- edge[bend right] (E);
-
- \uncover<2>{
- \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B)
- edge (C)
- (B) edge (E)
- (C) edge (E);}
- \end{tikzpicture}
-
- Partial order: \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick,-stealth'] (0pt,.5ex)
- -- (5mm,.5ex);
-
- \uncover<2>{\textcolor{blue}{Compatible as children of root:
- \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick] (0pt,.5ex) -- (5mm,.5ex);}}
- \end{exampleblock}
- \end{columns}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{The algorithm in action.}{The matching in the special graph.}
- \begin{columns}[t]
- \column{.3\textwidth}
- \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order}
- \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm]
- \tikzstyle{every node}=%
- [%
- fill=green!50!black!20,%
- draw=green!50!black,%
- minimum size=8mm,%
- circle,%
- thick%
- ]
-
- \node (A) {$A$};
- \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$};
- \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$};
- \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$};
- \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$};
-
- \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E)
- (B) edge (C)
- (D) edge (A)
- edge[bend right] (E);
-
- \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B)
- edge (C)
- (B) edge (E)
- (C) edge (E);
-
- \only<3->
- {
- \path[very thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth',red] (D) edge (A) (B) edge (C);
- \path [-,red,very thick](E) edge (B);
- }
- \end{tikzpicture}
- \end{exampleblock}
- \column{.7\textwidth}
- \begin{exampleblock}{Matching graph}
- \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm]
- \tikzstyle{every node}=%
- [%
- fill=green!50!black!20,%
- draw=green!50!black,%
- minimum size=8mm,%
- circle,%
- thick,%
- inner sep=0pt%
- ]
-
- \node (A) {$A$};
- \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$};
- \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$};
- \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$};
- \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$};
-
- \begin{scope}[xshift=4.75cm]
- \node (A') {$A'$};
- \node (B') [right of=A'] {$B'$};
- \node (C') [below of=B'] {$C'$};
- \node (D') [above of=A'] {$D'$};
- \node (E') [below of=A'] {$E'$};
- \end{scope}
-
- \path [thick] (A) edge (E')
- (B) edge (C')
- (D) edge (A')
- edge (E');
-
- \path [blue,thick](A') edge (B')
- edge (C')
- (B') edge (E')
- (C') edge (E');
-
- \only<2->
- {
- \path[very thick,red] (D) edge (A')
- (B) edge (C')
- (B') edge (E');
- }
- \end{tikzpicture}
- \end{exampleblock}
- \end{columns}
-
- \medskip
- \uncover<2->{A \alert{maximal matching} in the matching graph
- \uncover<3>{induces\\ \alert{perfect path phylogenies}.}}
-
- \hfill\hyperlink{return}{\beamerreturnbutton{Return}}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-foils.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,53 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified
-%
-% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
-% 2. under the GNU Public License.
-%
-% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
-
-% $Header$
-
-% This file is a demonstration on how a foils file should be
-% changed to make it work with beamer.
-
-% Copyright notice:
-
-% Since foiltex has a restricted license, I'm not able to include an
-% original example from foiltex. Instead, I'm providing a simple
-% example that shows the basic usage.
-
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-\usepackage{beamerfoils}
-\beamertemplatetheoremsnumbered
-
-\title{A Foils-To-Beamer Example}
-
-\author{Till Tantau}
-
-\MyLogo{\tiny-- Typeset by beamer emulation of \FoilTeX\ --}
-
-\leftheader{Till Tantau}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\frame{
-\maketitle
-}
-
-\foilhead{A first frame}
-
-Some text.
-
-\pagebreak
-
-More text on next slide.
-
-\foilhead{A third frame}
-
-Some text.
-
-\endfoil
-\end{document}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,13 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified
-%
-% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
-% 2. under the GNU Public License.
-%
-% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
-
-\documentclass[german,10pt]{beamer}
-
-\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex}
-\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex}
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,587 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified
-%
-% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
-% 2. under the GNU Public License.
-%
-% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
-
-%
-% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS\xA1!!
-%
-% Use a file in the directory solutions instead.
-% They are much better suited.
-%
-
-
-\lecture[1]{Syntax versus Semantik}{lecture-text}
-
-\subtitle{Text und seine Bedeutung}
-
-\date{27. Oktober 2006}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \maketitle
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\section*{Ziele und Inhalt}
-
-\begin{frame}{Die Lernziele der heutigen Vorlesung und der \xDCbungen.}
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Die Begriffe Syntax und Semantik erkl\xE4ren k\xF6nnen
- \item Syntaktische und semantische Elemente nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen und
- von Programmiersprachen benennen k\xF6nnen
- \item Die Begriffe Alphabet und Wort kennen
- \item Objekte als Worte kodieren k\xF6nnen
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}\frametitle<presentation>{Gliederung}
- \tableofcontents
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\section{Was ist Syntax?}
-
-\begin{frame}{Die zwei Hauptbegriffe der heutigen Vorlesung.}
- \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Syntax)}
- Unter einer \alert{Syntax} verstehen wir \alert{Regeln}, nach denen
- Texte \alert{strukturiert} werden d\xFCrfen.
- \end{block}
- \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Semantik)}
- Unter einer \alert{Semantik} verstehen wir die Zuordnung von
- \alert{Bedeutung} zu Text.
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection[Syntax \protect\\ nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen]{Syntax nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen}
-
-\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem \xE4gyptischen Text.}
- \includegraphicscopyright[width=6cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg}
- {Copyright by Guillaume Blanchard, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion}
-
- \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet.
- \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden,
- wie \xBBHieroglyphen stehen in Zeilen\xAB.
- \item Solche Regeln sind \alert{syntaktische Regeln} -- man kann sie
- \xFCberpr\xFCfen, ohne den Inhalt zu verstehen.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem kyrillischen Text.}
-
- \includegraphicscopyright[width=6.75cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg}
- {Copyright by Cristian Chirita, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion}
-
- \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet.
- \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden.
- \item Wir kennen mehr Regeln als bei den Hieroglyphen.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-
- \begin{block}{Zur Diskussion}
- Welche syntaktischen Regeln fallen Ihnen ein, die bei dem Text
- eingehalten wurden?
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem deutschen Text.}
- \begin{quotation}
- Informatiker lieben Logiker.
- \end{quotation}
-
- \bigskip
- \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Auch hier werden viele syntaktische Regeln eingehalten.
- \item Es f\xE4llt uns aber \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen.
- \item Der Grund ist, dass wir \alert{sofort \xFCber die Bedeutung
- nachdenken}.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von nat\xFCrlichen Sprachen.}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Die \alert{Syntax} einer nat\xFCrlichen Sprache ist die Menge an
- \alert{Regeln}, nach denen S\xE4tze gebildet werden d\xFCrfen.
- \item
- Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der gebildeten S\xE4tze
- ist dabei unerheblich.
- \item
- Jede Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax verschiedener
- Sprachen \xE4hneln sich aber oft.
- \item
- Es ist nicht immer klar, ob eine Regel noch zur Syntax geh\xF6rt
- oder ob es schon um den Sinn geht.
-
- \ExampleInline{Substantive werden gro\xDF geschrieben.}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\subsection{Syntax von Programmiersprachen}
-
-\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem Programmtext.}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\pgfpointadd#1#2{%
- \pgf at process{#1}%
- \pgf at xa=\pgf at x%
- \pgf at ya=\pgf at y%
- \pgf at process{#2}%
- \advance\pgf at x by\pgf at xa%
- \advance\pgf at y by\pgf at ya}
-\end{verbatim}
- \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Der Programmtext sieht sehr kryptisch aus.
- \item Trotzdem gibt es offenbar wieder Regeln.
- \item So scheint einem Doppelkreuz eine Ziffer zu folgen und
- Zeilen muss man offenbar mit Prozentzeichen beenden.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem weiteren Programmtext.}
-
-\begin{verbatim}
-for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
- a[i] = a[i];
-\end{verbatim}
- \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Wieder gibt es Regeln, die eingehalten werden.
- \item Wieder f\xE4llt es uns \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen, da
- wir \alert{sofort \xFCber den Sinn nachdenken}.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von Programmiersprachen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer Programmiersprache ist die
- \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Programmtexte gebildet werden
- d\xFCrfen.
- \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Programmtexte
- ist dabei egal.
- \item
- Jede Programmiersprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax
- verschiedener Sprachen \xE4hneln sich aber oft.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe}
- Welche der folgenden Regeln sind Syntax-Regeln?
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Bezeichner d\xFCrfen nicht mit einer Ziffer anfangen.
- \item Programme m\xFCssen in endlicher Zeit ein Ergebnis produzieren.
- \item \xD6ffnende und schlie\xDFende geschweifte Klammern m\xFCssen
- \xBBbalanciert\xAB sein.
- \item Methoden von Null-Objekten d\xFCrfen nicht aufgerufen werden.
- \item Variablen m\xFCssen vor ihrer ersten Benutzung deklariert werden.
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection[Syntax\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Syntax logischer Sprachen}
-
-\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einer logischen Formel.}
- \begin{quotation}
- $p \to q \land \neg q$
- \end{quotation}
-
- \bigskip
- \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Auch logische Formeln haben eine syntaktische Struktur.
- \item So w\xE4re es \alert{syntaktisch falsch}, statt einem Pfeil zwei
- Pfeile zu benutzen.
- \item Es w\xE4re aber \alert{syntaktisch richtig}, statt einem
- Negationszeichen zwei Negationszeichen zu verwenden.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{block}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von logischen Sprachen}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer logischen Sprache ist die
- \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Formeln gebildet werden
- d\xFCrfen.
- \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Formeln
- ist dabei egal.
- \item
- Jede logische Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax
- verschiedener Sprachen \xE4hneln sich aber oft.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section{Was ist Semantik?}
-
-\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen]{Semantik nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen}
-
-\begin{frame}{Was bedeutet ein Satz?}
-
- \begin{quotation}
- Der H\xF6rsaal ist gro\xDF.
- \end{quotation}
-
- \bigskip
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Dieser Satz hat eine \alert{Bedeutung}.
- \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt solche Bedeutungen fest.
- \item Syntaktisch falschen S\xE4tzen wird im Allgemeinen keine
- Bedeutung zugewiesen.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Ein Satz, zwei Bedeutungen.}
- \begin{quotation}
- Steter Tropfen h\xF6hlt den Stein.
- \end{quotation}
-
- \bigskip
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Ein Satz kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben}, welche durch
- \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind.
- \item In der \alert{wortw\xF6rtlichen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass
- Steine ausgeh\xF6hlte werden, wenn man jahrelang Wasser auf
- sie tropft.
- \item In der \alert{\xFCbertragenen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass
- sich Beharrlichkeit auszahlt.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Die Semantik der Hieroglyphen}
- \includegraphicscopyright[height=8cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg}
- {Unknown Author, Public Domain, Low Resolution}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Semantik von Programmiersprachen}
-
-\begin{frame}[fragile]{Was bedeutet ein Programm?}
-\begin{verbatim}
-for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
- a[i] = a[i];
-\end{verbatim}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Auch dieser Programmtext \xBBbedeutet etwas\xAB, wir \xBBmeinen etwas\xAB
- mit diesem Text.
- \item Die \alert{Semantik der Programmiersprache} legt fest,
- was mit dem Programmtext gemeint ist.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}[fragile]{Ein Programm, zwei Bedeutungen.}
-\begin{verbatim}
-for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
- a[i] = a[i];
-\end{verbatim}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Ein Programmtext kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben},
- welche durch \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind.
- \item In der \alert{operationalen Semantik} bedeutet der
- Programmtext, dass die ersten einhundert Elemente eines Arrays
- \verb!a! nacheinander ihren eigenen Wert zugewiesen bekommen.
- \item In der \alert{denotationellen Semantik} bedeutet der
- Programmtext, dass nichts passiert.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Semantik logischer Sprachen}
-
-
-
-
-\section{Grundlage der Syntax: Text}
-
-\begin{frame}{Eine mathematische Sicht auf Text.}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Viele (aber nicht alle!) syntaktische Systeme bauen auf
- \alert{Text} auf.
- \item Auch solche Systeme, die nicht auf Text aufbauen, lassen sich
- trotzdem durch Text beschreiben.
- \item Es ist deshalb n\xFCtzlich, auf Text \text{Methoden der
- Mathematik} anwenden zu k\xF6nnen.
- \item Im Folgenden wird deshalb die \alert{mathematische Sicht} auf
- Text eingef\xFChrt, die \alert{in der gesamten Theoretischen
- Informatik} genutzt wird.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Alphabete}
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Alphabete}
- \begin{definition}[Alphabet]
- Ein \alert{Alphabet} ist eine nicht-leere, endliche Menge von
- \alert{Symbolen} (auch \alert{Buchstaben} genannt).
- \end{definition}
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Alphabete werden h\xE4ufig mit griechischen Gro\xDFbuchstaben
- bezeichnet, also $\Gamma$ oder~$\Sigma$. Manchmal auch mit
- lateinischen Gro\xDFbuchstaben, also $N$ oder~$T$.
- \item Ein Symbol oder \xBBBuchstabe\xAB kann auch ein komplexes oder
- komisches \xBBDing\xAB sein wie ein Pointer oder ein Leerzeichen.
- \end{itemize}
-
- \begin{examples}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Die Gro\xDF- und Kleinbuchstaben
- \item Die Menge $\{0,1\}$ (bei Informatikern beliebt)
- \item Die Menge $\{A,C,G,T\}$ (bei Biologen beliebt)
- \item Die Zeichenmenge des UNICODE.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{examples}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Worte}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Worte}
- \begin{definition}[Wort]
- Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine (endliche) Folge von Symbolen.
- \end{definition}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item \xBBWorte\xAB sind im Prinzip dasselbe wie
- Strings. Insbesondere k\xF6nnen in Worten Leerzeichen als Symbole
- auftauchen.
- \item Die Menge aller Worte \xFCber einem Alphabet $\Sigma$ hat einen
- besonderen Namen: $\Sigma^*$.
- \item
- Deshalb schreibt man oft: \xBBSei $w \in \Sigma^*$, \dots\xAB
- \item Es gibt auch ein \alert{leeres Wort}, abgek\xFCrzt
- $\epsilon$ oder $\lambda$, das dem String
- \texttt{\char`\"\char`\"} entspricht.
- \end{itemize}
-
- \begin{examples}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item \texttt{Hallo}
- \item \texttt{TATAAAATATTA}
- \item $\epsilon$
- \item \texttt{Hallo Welt.}
- \end{itemize}
- \end{examples}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe}
- Die folgenden Aufgaben sind nach Schwierigkeit sortiert. L\xF6sen Sie
- \alert{eine} der Aufgaben.
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item
- Schreiben Sie alle Worte der L\xE4nge h\xF6chstens $2$ \xFCber dem Alphabet
- $\Sigma = \{0,1,*\}$ auf.
- \item
- Wie viele Worte der L\xE4nge $n$ \xFCber dem Alphabet $\Sigma =
- \{0,1,*\}$ gibt es?
- \item
- Wie viele Worte der L\xE4nge h\xF6chstens $n$ \xFCber einem Alphabet mit
- $q$ Buchstaben gibt es?
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Sprachen}
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Definition}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Nat\xFCrlichen Sprachen sind komplexe Dinge, bestehend aus
- W\xF6rtern, ihrer Ausprache, einer Grammatik, Ausnahmen, Dialekten,
- und vielem mehr.
- \item Bei \alert{formalen Sprachen} vereinfacht man radikal.
- \item Formale Sprachen m\xFCssen weder sinnvoll noch interessant sein.
- \end{itemize}
-
- \begin{definition}[Formale Sprache]
- Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine (oft unendliche!) Menge von
- Worten f\xFCr ein festes Alphabet.
- \end{definition}
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Statt \frqq formale Sprache\flqq\ sagt man einfach \frqq Sprache\flqq.
- \item Als Menge von Worten ist eine Sprache eine Teilmenge von
- $\Sigma^*$.
- \item
- Deshalb schreibt man oft: \frqq Sei $L \subseteq \Sigma^*$,
- \dots\flqq
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Einfache Beispiele}
- \begin{examples}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Die Menge $\{AAA, AAC, AAT\}$ (endliche Sprache).
- \item Die Menge aller Java-Programmtexte (unendliche Sprache).
- \item Die Menge aller Basensequenzen, die \texttt{TATA} enthalten
- (unendliche Sprache).
- \end{itemize}
- \end{examples}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Ein Renderer produziert 3D-Bilder.
- \item Dazu erh\xE4lt er eine \alert{Szenerie} als Eingabe.
- \item Diese Szenerie ist als \alert{Text}, also als ein \alert{Wort} gegeben.
- \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle
- \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Szenerien} enth\xE4lt.
- \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Das
- \xBBWort\xAB, das eine Szenerie beschreibt\dots}
-\only<presentation>{\scriptsize}
-\begin{verbatim*}
-global_settings { assumed_gamma 1.0 }
-
-camera {
- location <10.0, 10, -10.0>
- direction 1.5*z
- right x*image_width/image_height
- look_at <0.0, 0.0, 0.0>
-}
-
-sky_sphere { pigment { color rgb <0.6,0.7,1.0> } }
-
-light_source {
- <0, 0, 0> // light's position (translated below)
- color rgb <1, 1, 1> // light's color
- translate <-30, 30, -30>
- shadowless
-}
-
-#declare i = 0;
-#declare Steps = 30;
-#declare Kugel = sphere{<0,0,0>,0.5 pigment{color rgb<1,0,0>}};
-
-#while(i<Steps)
- object{Kugel translate<3,0,0> rotate <0,i * 360 / Steps, 0> }
- #declare i = i + 1;
-#end
-\end{verbatim*}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{\dots\ und was es bedeutet.}
- \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg}
- {Copyright Matthias Kabel, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Komplexeres Beispielbild, das ein Renderer produziert.}
- \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg}
- {Copyright Giorgio Krenkel and Alex Sandri, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik}
- \begin{itemize}
- \item In der Bioinformatik untersucht man unter anderem Proteine.
- \item Dazu erh\xE4lt man \alert{Molek\xFClbeschreibungen} als Eingabe.
- \item Eine solche ist auch ein \alert{Wort}.
- \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle
- \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Molk\xFClbeschreibungen} enth\xE4lt.
- \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik}
- {Das \xBBWort\xAB, das ein Protein beschreibt\dots}
-\only<presentation>{\tiny}
-\only<article>{\footnotesize}
-\begin{verbatim}
-HEADER HYDROLASE 25-JUL-03 1UJ1
-TITLE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE OF SARS CORONAVIRUS MAIN PROTEINASE
-TITLE 2 (3CLPRO)
-COMPND MOL_ID: 1;
-COMPND 2 MOLECULE: 3C-LIKE PROTEINASE;
-COMPND 3 CHAIN: A, B;
-COMPND 4 SYNONYM: MAIN PROTEINASE, 3CLPRO;
-COMPND 5 EC: 3.4.24.-;
-COMPND 6 ENGINEERED: YES
-SOURCE MOL_ID: 1;
-SOURCE 2 ORGANISM_SCIENTIFIC: SARS CORONAVIRUS;
-SOURCE 3 ORGANISM_COMMON: VIRUSES;
-SOURCE 4 STRAIN: SARS;
-...
-REVDAT 1 18-NOV-03 1UJ1 0
-JRNL AUTH H.YANG,M.YANG,Y.DING,Y.LIU,Z.LOU,Z.ZHOU,L.SUN,L.MO,
-JRNL AUTH 2 S.YE,H.PANG,G.F.GAO,K.ANAND,M.BARTLAM,R.HILGENFELD,
-JRNL AUTH 3 Z.RAO
-JRNL TITL THE CRYSTAL STRUCTURES OF SEVERE ACUTE RESPIRATORY
-JRNL TITL 2 SYNDROME VIRUS MAIN PROTEASE AND ITS COMPLEX WITH
-JRNL TITL 3 AN INHIBITOR
-JRNL REF PROC.NAT.ACAD.SCI.USA V. 100 13190 2003
-JRNL REFN ASTM PNASA6 US ISSN 0027-8424
-....
-ATOM 1 N PHE A 3 63.478 -27.806 23.971 1.00 44.82 N
-ATOM 2 CA PHE A 3 64.607 -26.997 24.516 1.00 42.13 C
-ATOM 3 C PHE A 3 64.674 -25.701 23.723 1.00 41.61 C
-ATOM 4 O PHE A 3 65.331 -25.633 22.673 1.00 40.73 O
-ATOM 5 CB PHE A 3 65.912 -27.763 24.358 1.00 44.33 C
-ATOM 6 CG PHE A 3 67.065 -27.162 25.108 1.00 44.20 C
-ATOM 7 CD1 PHE A 3 67.083 -27.172 26.496 1.00 43.35 C
-ATOM 8 CD2 PHE A 3 68.135 -26.595 24.422 1.00 43.49 C
-ATOM 9 CE1 PHE A 3 68.140 -26.631 27.187 1.00 43.21 C
-ATOM 10 CE2 PHE A 3 69.210 -26.046 25.108 1.00 42.91 C
-ATOM 11 CZ PHE A 3 69.216 -26.062 26.493 1.00 43.22 C
-ATOM 12 N ARG A 4 64.007 -24.666 24.228 1.00 34.90 N
-ATOM 13 CA ARG A 4 63.951 -23.376 23.543 1.00 37.71 C
-...
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik}
- {\dots\ und das Protein, das beschrieben wird.}
-
- \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg}
- {Copyright Till Tantau, Low Resultion}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\section<article>{Zusammenfassung}
-\section<presentation>*{Zusammenfassung}
-
-\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung}
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine Folge von Symbolen aus einem
- \alert{Alphabet}.
- \item Eine \alert{Syntax} besteht aus Regeln, nach denen
- Worte (Texte) gebaut werden d\xFCrfen.
- \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt fest, was Worte \alert{bedeuten}.
- \item Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine Menge von Worten
- \xFCber einem Alphabet.
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
-
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified
-%
-% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
-% 2. under the GNU Public License.
-%
-% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
-
-\documentclass[german,a4paper,9pt]{extarticle}
-\usepackage{beamerarticle}
-\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex}
-\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex}
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,233 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified
-%
-% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
-% 2. under the GNU Public License.
-%
-% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
-
-
-% Common packages
-
-\usepackage[german]{babel}
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-\usepackage{times}
-\mode<article>
-{
- \usepackage{times}
- \usepackage{mathptmx}
- \usepackage[left=1.5cm,right=6cm,top=1.5cm,bottom=3cm]{geometry}
-}
-
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\usepackage{tikz}
-\usepackage{colortbl}
-\usepackage{yfonts}
-\usepackage{colortbl}
-\usepackage{translator} % comment this, if not available
-
-
-% Common settings for all lectures in this course
-
-\def\lecturename{Logik f\xFCr Informatiker}
-
-\title{\insertlecture}
-
-\author{Till Tantau}
-
-\institute
-{
- Institut f\xFCr Theoretische Informatik\\
- Universit\xE4t zu L\xFCbeck
-}
-
-\subject{Vorlesung \lecturename}
-
-
-
-
-% Beamer version theme settings
-
-\useoutertheme[height=0pt,width=2cm,right]{sidebar}
-\usecolortheme{rose,sidebartab}
-\useinnertheme{circles}
-\usefonttheme[only large]{structurebold}
-
-\setbeamercolor{sidebar right}{bg=black!15}
-\setbeamercolor{structure}{fg=blue}
-\setbeamercolor{author}{parent=structure}
-
-\setbeamerfont{title}{series=\normalfont,size=\LARGE}
-\setbeamerfont{title in sidebar}{series=\bfseries}
-\setbeamerfont{author in sidebar}{series=\bfseries}
-\setbeamerfont*{item}{series=}
-\setbeamerfont{frametitle}{size=}
-\setbeamerfont{block title}{size=\small}
-\setbeamerfont{subtitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\normalfont}
-
-\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{}
-\setbeamertemplate{bibliography item}[book]
-\setbeamertemplate{sidebar right}
-{
- {\usebeamerfont{title in sidebar}%
- \vskip1.5em%
- \hskip3pt%
- \usebeamercolor[fg]{title in sidebar}%
- \insertshorttitle[width=\dimexpr2cm-6pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par%
- \vskip1.25em%
- }%
- {%
- \hskip1pt%
- \usebeamercolor[fg]{author in sidebar}%
- \usebeamerfont{author in sidebar}%
- \insertshortauthor[width=\dimexpr2cm-2pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par%
- \vskip1.25em%
- }%
- \hbox to2cm{\hss\insertlogo\hss}
- \vskip1.25em%
- \insertverticalnavigation{2cm}%
- \vfill
- \hbox to 2cm{\hfill\usebeamerfont{subsection in
- sidebar}\strut\usebeamercolor[fg]{subsection in
- sidebar}\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber\hskip5pt}%
- \vskip3pt%
-}%
-
-\setbeamertemplate{title page}
-{
- \vbox{}
- \vskip1em
- {\huge Kapitel \insertshortlecture\par}
- {\usebeamercolor[fg]{title}\usebeamerfont{title}\inserttitle\par}%
- \ifx\insertsubtitle\@empty%
- \else%
- \vskip0.25em%
- {\usebeamerfont{subtitle}\usebeamercolor[fg]{subtitle}\insertsubtitle\par}%
- \fi%
- \vskip1em\par
- Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename}\ vom \insertdate\par
- \vskip0pt plus1filll
- \leftskip=0pt plus1fill\insertauthor\par
- \insertinstitute\vskip1em
-}
-
-\logo{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf}}
-
-
-
-% Article version layout settings
-
-\mode<article>
-
-\makeatletter
-\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
- \parsep 0pt
- \topsep 5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
- \itemsep0pt}
-\let\@listi=\@listI
-
-
-\setbeamertemplate{frametitle}{\paragraph*{\insertframetitle\
- \ \small\insertframesubtitle}\ \par
-}
-\setbeamertemplate{frame end}{%
- \marginpar{\scriptsize\hbox to 1cm{\sffamily%
- \hfill\strut\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber}\hrule height .2pt}}
-\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1cm}
-\setlength{\marginparsep}{4.5cm}
-
-\def\@maketitle{\makechapter}
-
-\def\makechapter{
- \newpage
- \null
- \vskip 2em%
- {%
- \parindent=0pt
- \raggedright
- \sffamily
- \vskip8pt
- {\fontsize{36pt}{36pt}\selectfont Kapitel \insertshortlecture \par\vskip2pt}
- {\fontsize{24pt}{28pt}\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertlecture\par\vskip4pt}
- {\Large\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertsubtitle\par}
- \vskip10pt
-
- \normalsize\selectfont Druckfassung der
- Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename} vom \@date\par\vskip1.5em
- \hfill Till Tantau, Institut f\xFCr Theoretische Informatik, Universit\xE4t zu L\xFCbeck
- }
- \par
- \vskip 1.5em%
-}
-
-\let\origstartsection=\@startsection
-\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- \origstartsection{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6\normalfont\sffamily\color{blue!50!black}\selectfont}}
-
-\makeatother
-
-\mode
-<all>
-
-
-
-
-% Typesetting Listings
-
-\usepackage{listings}
-\lstset{language=Java}
-
-\alt<presentation>
-{\lstset{%
- basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,
- commentstyle=\slshape\color{green!50!black},
- keywordstyle=\bfseries\color{blue!50!black},
- identifierstyle=\color{blue},
- stringstyle=\color{orange},
- escapechar=\#,
- emphstyle=\color{red}}
-}
-{
- \lstset{%
- basicstyle=\ttfamily,
- keywordstyle=\bfseries,
- commentstyle=\itshape,
- escapechar=\#,
- emphstyle=\bfseries\color{red}
- }
-}
-
-
-
-% Common theorem-like environments
-
-\theoremstyle{definition}
-\newtheorem{exercise}[theorem]{\translate{Exercise}}
-
-
-
-
-% New useful definitions:
-
-\newbox\mytempbox
-\newdimen\mytempdimen
-
-\newcommand\includegraphicscopyright[3][]{%
- \leavevmode\vbox{\vskip3pt\raggedright\setbox\mytempbox=\hbox{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
- \mytempdimen=\wd\mytempbox\box\mytempbox\par\vskip1pt%
- \fontsize{3}{3.5}\selectfont{\color{black!25}{\vbox{\hsize=\mytempdimen#3}}}\vskip3pt%
-}}
-
-\newenvironment{colortabular}[1]{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{blue!20}{blue!10}\tabular{#1}\rowcolor{blue!40}}{\endtabular\medskip}
-
-\def\equad{\leavevmode\hbox{}\quad}
-
-\newenvironment{greencolortabular}[1]
-{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{green!50!black!20}{green!50!black!10}%
- \tabular{#1}\rowcolor{green!50!black!40}}%
-{\endtabular\medskip}
-
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-prosper.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
-%
-% This file may be distributed and/or modified
-%
-% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
-% 2. under the GNU Public License.
-%
-% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
-
-% $Header$
-
-\documentclass[notes]{beamer}
-
-% You might wish to try this instead of the above line:
-%\documentclass[class=article]{beamer}
-%\usepackage{beamerbasearticle}
-%\usepackage{hyperref}
-
-\usepackage[framesassubsections]{beamerprosper}
-
-\mode<presentation>
-{
- \definecolor{beamerstructure}{RGB}{43,79,112}
- \definecolor{sidebackground}{RGB}{230,242,250}
- \color{beamerstructure}
- \usetheme{Goettingen}
- \usepackage{times}
- \userightsidebarcolortemplate{\color{sidebackground}}
- \beamertemplateballitem
-}
-
-
-\title{A Beamer Presentation Using (HA-)Prosper Commands}
-\subtitle{Subtitles Are Also Supported}
-\author{Till Tantau}
-\institution{The Institution is Mapped To Institute}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\tsectionandpart{Introduction}
-
-\overlays{2}{
-\begin{slide}[trans=Glitter]{About this file}
- \begin{itemstep}
- \item
- This is a beamer presentation.
- \item
- You can use the prosper and the HA-prosper syntax.
- \item
- This is done by mapping prosper and HA-prosper commands to beamer
- commands.
- \item
- The emulation is by no means perfect.
- \end{itemstep}
-\end{slide}
-}
-
-
-\section{Second Section}
-
-\subsection{A subsection}
-
-\frame
-{
- \frametitle{A frame created using the \texttt{frame} command.}
-
- \begin{itemize}[<+->]
- \item You can still use the original beamer syntax.
- \item The emulation is intended only to make recycling slides
- easier, not to install a whole new syntax for beamer.
- \end{itemize}
-}
-
-\begin{notes}{Notes for these slides}
-My notes for these slides.
-\end{notes}
-
-\end{document}
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-seminar.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,331 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be
-% changed to make it work with beamer.
-
-
-% Copyright notice:
-
-% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original
-% file semsamp2.tex, which is part of the examples of the seminar
-% package.
-
-
-%% BEGIN semsamp2.tex
-% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later).
-%
-% This file contains both landscape and portrait mode slides.
-% Choose one of the following to print them out:
-% - If using PSTricks, try the semcolor style option.
-% - If using Rokicki's dvips, try the semrot style option.
-% - To print the landscape slides, put \landscapeonly in the preamble.
-% To print the portrait slides, include the portrait style option and
-% put \portraitonly in the preamble.
-%
-%
-
-% CHANGED: commented the following:
-%\documentstyle[%
-% slidesonly,% Try notes or notesonly instead.
-% %notes,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset the notes.
-% %notesonly,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset notes and slides.
-% %semcolor,% Try me if using PSTricks.
-% %semrot,% Try me if using Rokicki's dvips.
-% %semhelv,% Try me if using a PostScript printer.
-% %article,% Try me.
-% %portrait,% Try me.
-% %sem-a4,% Try me if using A4 paper.
-% semlayer% This must be included, but you need the semcolor option to
-% ]{seminar} % actually see the overlays.
-%
-%\slidesmag{5}
-%\articlemag{1}
-%
-%%\twoup % Try me for twoup printing.
-%
-%%\portraitonly % To print only portrait slides
-%%\landscapeonly % To print only landscape slides
-%
-%%\notslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: The slides are omitted.
-%%\onlyslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: Only these slides are included.
-%%\onlynotestoo %Try me: For selecting notes as well.
-%
-%\colorlayers{red,blue} % Try deleting this if using the semcolor option,
-% % to get \blue and \red to use PostScript color.
-%
-%%\overlaysfalse % Suppress overlays with semcolor option.
-%%\layersfalse % Suppress color layers with semcolor option.
-%
-%\rotateheaderstrue % Try this out if using rotation macros.
-
-% CHANGED: Added following three lines:
-\documentclass[ignorenonframetext]{beamer}
-\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar}
- % remove ``accumulated'' option
- % for original behaviour
-\usepackage{beamerthemeclassic}
-
-\title{Example for seminar.sty}
-\author{Policarpa Salabarrieta}
-\date{July 21, 1991}
-
-\newcommand{\sref}[1]{SLIDE \ref{#1}}
-
-% CHANGED: different definition of \heading
-%\newcommand{\heading}[1]{\begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}}
-\let\heading=\frametitle
-
-% CHANGED: Commented:
-%\newpagestyle{MH}%
-% {University of Guaduas, March 13, 1998\hfil\thepage}{}
-%\pagestyle{MH}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame
-\frame{
-\maketitle % This won't show up when \onlynotestoo is in effect.
-}
-
-% CHANGED: Commented
-%\begin{slide}
-% \ifslidesonly % Title slide only for slidesonly selection.
-% \maketitle
-% \addtocounter{slide}{-1}
-% \slidepagestyle{empty}
-% \fi
-%\end{slide}
-
-
-This is a lot of gobbledy-gook intended only to illustrate some of the
-features of seminar.sty.
-
- The phrase information overload rings a bell with just about anyone.
-Certainly you all receive more working papers or more applications for
-graduate school than you can readily read. Nevertheless, the term information
-overload is ill-defined. (\sref{too_much}, top)
-
- A message like this when you check your email conjures up the notion of
-information overload. More generally, information overload always means too
-much information, in some sense or another. But what does ``too much'' mean?
-(\sref{too_much}, bottom) It might just mean that people cannot process all
-the information they receive. That is certainly true for everyone. A claim
-that is much stronger, and that is implicit when people complain about
-information overload, is that people {\em should} receive less information, by
-some criterion.
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame
-\frame{
-\begin{slide}\label{too_much}%
-\begin{center}
- \large\bf
- Information overload = ``Too much'' information
-\end{center}
-\smallskip
-
-\begin{verse} \bf\tt
- You have 134 unread messages:\\
- Do you want to read them now?
-\end{verse}
-
-\begin{enumerate}
- {\overlay2
- \item People {\overlay1 cannot process all} the information they receive.}
- \item People {\em should} receive less information.
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{slide}
-}
-
- In this paper, I use the term ``information overload'' in both senses.
-(\sref{overload}, bottom). Specifically, I say that an {\em individual} is
-overloaded with information if she receives more information than she can
-process. But I say that there is information overload in a {\em network} if
-there is some mechanism that makes the senders and/or receivers better off by
-restricting the flow of information. This latter notion of information
-overload is an equilibrium property, and it depends on what we mean by
-``better off.''
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame
-\frame{
-\begin{slide*}\label{overload}
-\ptsize{12}
-
-\begin{itemize}{\overlay1
- \item There is information {\overlay0 overload in a network if} there is
-some mechanism that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders
-and/or receivers better off by restricting the flow} of information.'
-
- \item There is information overload in a network if there is some mechanism
-that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders and/or receivers
-better off by restricting the flow of information.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\end{slide*}
-}
-
-(\sref{questions})
- The purpose of my paper is to show why there can be information overload in
-a network and what kind of mechanisms can make the receivers and/or senders
-better off. Since the cost of communication is one factor that restricts
-communication, I am thus also going to look at how the welfare of the senders
-and receivers depends on the cost of communication.
-
- Most messages don't become jumbled and we can choose which ones to process.
-But some of us may have a bias towards choosing to process more information
-than we should, like the graduate student who feels compelled to read every
-article on the usual lengthy reading list, and just ends up getting confused
-and ruffling through the papers.
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame
-\frame{
-\begin{slide}[7.3in,5.5in] \label{questions}
-\heading{Questions}
-
-\begin{itemize}
- {\overlay1\item When could {\blue there be overload} in networks?}
- \item What mechanism make the receivers and senders better off?
- \item How does the welfare {\red of the senders} and receivers depend on the
-cost of communication?
-\end{itemize}
-\end{slide}
-}
-
-However, experiments in consumer research and psychology have failed to find
-that such a bias is prevalent. This is in spite of the fact that it is common
-for stress and cognitive strain to increase with information load. We may
-incur such stress and strain because the information we choose to process is
-valuable to us.
-
-More commonly, then, we can and do choose to process roughly as much
-information as we can handle efficiently. This is called screening. But when
-we choose which messages to begin to process, we're ignorant of their
-contents, since otherwise there would be no reason to process them in the
-first place. Therefore, if we receive more junk mail, then some of the
-important mail gets crowded out, and we are effectively less informed.
-
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame
-\frame{
-\begin{slide} \label{informed}
-\begin{center}
- {\bf Being more informed} \par
- \smallskip
- is always better,\par
- \medskip
- \overlay1{but it's not the same as \par
- \smallskip
- {\bf receiving more information}}
-\end{center}
-\end{slide}
-}
-
- Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
-present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
-ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
-want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
-information. Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that
-sender will prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the
-sender has an interest in which messages the receiver processes.
-But when there are more senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the
-messages of the other senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't
-take this external cost into account when sending messages, they may
-collectively overload the receiver. (\sref{akbar})
-
-There are several reasons that our scarcity of attention, that is, our limited
-capacity to process information, can mean that we become less informed when we
-receive more information. I have a cartoon here to illustrate these reasons.
-(\sref{akbar})
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame
-\frame{
-\begin{slide}\label{akbar}\def\slidefuzz{15pt}
- {\large A tax $\tau$ on communication is said to support
-$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is an equilibrium for
-$\Gamma(c+\tau)$.}
-\medskip
-
- {\bf Proposition 6.} {\em Assume $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is not an equilibrium
-for $\Gamma(c)$.\vspace{-3pt}
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=[0,1]^n$, there is no tax that supports
-$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$.
- \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=S^{n-1}$, there is a tax that supports
-$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if and only if $m=1$, $p_j>c\, \forall j$, and
- \begin{enumerate}
- \item $n=2$; or
- \item $n=3$ and $p_i^{-1}+p_j^{-1}\geq p_k^{-1}$ for all distinct
-$i,j,k$; or
- \item $n=4$ and $p_1=p_2=p_3=p_4$.
-\end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}}
-\end{slide}
-}
- If, by restricting communication, we eliminate the less relevant messages,
-then we can become more informed. But how can we achieve this? Restricting the
-flow of information shifts the task of screening messages from the receivers
-to the senders. Unlike the receivers, the senders do know the contents of the
-messages they originate. If the senders' interests coincide with those of the
-receiver and if the senders have sufficient knowledge about the receivers,
-then the senders will choose the messages which are most relevant to the
-receivers. This may make the receivers, and even the senders, better off.
-
- The network in Slide \ref{architectures} attains the minimal delay $c(8,24)
-= 6$ using 8 processors. It is an example of the efficient one-shot networks
-described by Foo. We will focus on a class of networks that are similar to the
-Foo networks but that may differ slightly. For $q$, $c$ and $n$ such that $1
-\leq q \leq \lfloor n/2 \rfloor$ and $c(q,n) \leq c \leq n$, let $R_{nqc}$ be
-the class of essential networks for adding $n$ items using $q$ processors in
-$c$ cycles that have the following properties:
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame
-\frame{
-\begin{slide*}\label{architectures}
-\heading{Architecture}
-
-\begin{center}
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1.65in}
-\begin{picture}(1.1,1.6)(3.5,5.0)
-\put(4.0,6.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,6.5){1}
-\put(4.0,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,6.0){2}
-\put(4.0,6.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\put(3.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(3.6,6.0){3}
-\put(3.6,6.1){\vector(1,1){.3}}
-\put(4.0,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,5.5){4}
-\put(4.0,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\put(4.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.6,6.0){5}
-\put(4.4,6.1){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
-\put(4.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.6,5.5){6}
-\put(4.4,5.6){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
-\put(3.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(3.6,5.5){7}
-\put(3.5,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\put(4.0,5.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,5.0){8}
-\put(4.0,5.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\end{picture}
-\end{center}
-\end{slide*}
-}
-
-Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
-present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
-ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
-want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
-information.
-
-Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that sender will
-prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the sender has
-an interest in which messages the receiver processes. But when there are more
-senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the messages of the other
-senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't take this external cost
-into account when sending messages, they may collectively overload the
-receiver. (\sref{architectures})
-
-\end{document}
-%% END semsamp2.tex
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerexample-texpower.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,271 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be
-% changed to make it work with beamer.
-
-
-% Copyright notice:
-
-% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original
-% file texpower-0.0.9d/doc/seminardemo.tex, which is part of the
-% examples of the texpower package.
-
-
-
-% seminardemo.tex,v 1.2 2002/11/14 20:46:00 hansfn Exp
-%
-% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
-% Copyright (C) 1999-2002 Stephan Lehmke
-%
-% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
-% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
-% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
-% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
-%
-% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
-% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
-% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
-% GNU General Public License for more details.
-%
-%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-% File: seminardemo.tex
-%
-% Simple examples the for combining the seminar class with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
-%
-%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke at cs.uni-dortmund.de>
-%
-% v0.0.1 Jun 02, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
-%
-
-
-% CHANGED: commented
-%\documentclass{seminar}
-%
-%% We need fixseminar for setting the page size correctly.
-%
-%\usepackage{fixseminar}
-%
-%
-%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-%% The texpower package is loaded.
-%% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
-%%
-%\usepackage[display]{texpower}
-
-% CHANGED: Added
-\documentclass[slidestop,usepdftitle=false]{beamer}
-\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar}
-\usepackage{beamertexpower}
-\usepackage{beamerthemeshadow}
-
-
-% CHANGED: Moved \title and \author outside of slide
-\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\ {\normalfont \texttt{seminar} Demo}}
-\author[Stephan Lehmke]{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke at cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
-
-\begin{document}
-\begin{slide}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\newslide
-
-\tableofcontents
-\end{slide}
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out, added \frametitle
-\section{A list environment}
-\frame{
-\begin{slide}
-\centerslidesfalse
-\frametitle{A list environment}
-
-% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
-% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
-% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
-% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
-% the next page.
-
-\pause
-
-% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
-% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
-% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
-% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
-
-\stepwise
-{%
- \begin{description}
- \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
- \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
- \end{description}
- }
-
-
-
-\end{slide}
-}
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out
-\section{An aligned equation}
-\frame{
-\begin{slide}
-\centerslidesfalse
-\frametitle{An aligned equation}
-
-\pause
-
-% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
-% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
-% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
-% proper amount of white space.
-
-\parstepwise
-{%
- % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
- % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
- % numbers `appear'.
- \begin{eqnarray}
- %
- % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
- % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
- % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
- %
- \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
- %
- & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
- %
- & \step{=} & \restep
- {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
- % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
- % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
- % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
- % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
- % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
- \switch
- {%
- \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
- (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
- }
- {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
- }
- \\
- %
- % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
- % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
- %
- & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
- \end{eqnarray}
-}
-
-
-
-
-\end{slide}
-}
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out
-\section{An array}
-\frame{
-\begin{slide}
- \centerslidesfalse
- \frametitle{An array}
-
-\stepwise
-{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
- %
- % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
- % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
- % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
- %
- % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
- % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
- % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
- % a) using only p cells,
- % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
- % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
- % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
- %
- \begin{displaymath}
- \begin{array}{rrrrr}
- \step
- {%
- n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
- \hline%
- }%
- \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
- \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
- \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
- \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
- \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
- \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
- \end{array}
- \end{displaymath}
-}
-
-
-
-
-\end{slide}
-}
-
-% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out
-\section{A picture}
-\frame{
-\begin{slide}
-\centerslidesfalse
-\frametitle{A picture}
-
-\pause
-
-\begin{center}%
- \stepwise
- {%
- \setlength{\unitlength}{1.5\semcm}%
- \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
- \begin{picture}(14,2)
- \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
- \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
- \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
- \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
- \step
- {
- \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
- \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
- \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
- \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
- }
- \step
- {
- \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
- \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
- }
- \step
- {
- \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
- }
- \step
- {
- \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
- %
- % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
- % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
- % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
- % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
- %
- \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\footnotesize $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
- }
- \step
- {
- \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
- \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
- \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
- \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
- }
- \end{picture}%
- }%
-\end{center}%
-\end{slide}
-}
-\end{document}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-compatibility.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -79,10 +79,10 @@
If you wish to emulate the |foils| class using \beamer, please see Section~\ref{section-foiltex}.
\end{class}
-\begin{package}{{fontenc}|[|\declare{|T1,EU1,EU2|}|]|}
- Use the |T1| option \emph{only} with fonts that have outline fonts available in the T1 encoding like |times| or the |lmodern| fonts. In a standard installation standard Computer Modern fonts (the fonts Donald Knuth originally designed and which are used by default) are \emph{not} available in the T1 encoding. Using this option with them will result in very poor rendering of your presentation when viewed with \pdf\ viewer applications like Acrobat, |xpdf|, |evince| or |okular|. To use the Computer Modern fonts with the T1 encoding, use the package |lmodern|. See also Section~\ref{section-font-encoding}. This applies both to |latex|+|dvips| and |pdflatex|
+\begin{package}{{fontenc}|[|\declare{|T1,TU|}|]|}
+ Use the |T1| option \emph{only} with fonts that have outline fonts available in the T1 encoding like |times| or the |lmodern| fonts. In a standard installation standard Computer Modern fonts (the fonts Donald Knuth originally designed and which are used by default) are \emph{not} available in the T1 encoding. Using this option with them will result in very poor rendering of your presentation when viewed with \pdf\ viewer applications like Acrobat, |xpdf|, |evince| or |okular|. To use the Computer Modern fonts with the T1 encoding, make sure you have installed |cm-super| package in your \TeX\ distribution, or use Latin Modern fonts provided by |lmorden| instead. See also Section~\ref{section-font-encoding}. This applies both to |latex|+|dvips| and |pdflatex|.
- Use the |EU1| option with |xelatex|, and |EU2| option with |lualatex|. Note that |xelatex| and |luatex| support OpenType fonts, and font encodings work very different compared to |pdflatex|. Again, see Section~\ref{section-font-encoding} for more information.
+ The newest version of \LaTeXe\ kernel has introduced TU encoding for |xelatex| and |lualatex|. Note that |xelatex| and |lualatex| support OpenType fonts, and font encodings work very different compared to |pdflatex|. Again, see Section~\ref{section-font-encoding} for more information.
\end{package}
\begin{package}{{fourier}}
@@ -168,7 +168,13 @@
\begin{package}{{paralist}}
\beamernote
- \beamer\ automatically patches list-related commands using |beamerpatchparalist| package at the beginning of document.
+ \beamer\ automatically patches list-related commands using |beamerpatchparalist| package at the beginning of document. Besides, \beamer\ also supports using |compactitem| and |compactenum| environments with overlays, just like the usage of |enumerate| environments:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begin{compactitem}[<+->][$\bullet$]
+ \item Alpha
+ \item Bravo
+\end{compactitem}
+\end{verbatim}
\end{package}
\begin{package}{{pdfpages}}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-elements.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@
\begin{outerthemeexample}{infolines}
This theme installs a headline showing the current section and the current subsection. It installs a footline showing the author's name, the institution, the presentation's title, the current date, and a frame count. This theme uses only little space.
- The colors used in the headline and footline are drawn from |palette primary|, |palette secondary|, and |primary tertiary| (see Section~\ref{section-colors} for details on how to change these).
+ The colors used in the headline and footline are drawn from |palette primary|, |palette secondary|, and |palette tertiary| (see Section~\ref{section-colors} for details on how to change these).
\end{outerthemeexample}
\begin{outerthemeexample}[\oarg{options}]{miniframes}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-fonts.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@
\end{verbatim}
to get beautiful outline fonts and correct hyphenation. Note, however, that certain older versions of the LM~bundle did not include correct glyphs for ligatures like ``fi,'' which may cause trouble. Double check that all ligatures are displayed correctly and, if not, update your installation.
-Everything mentioned above applies to |pdflatex| and |latex|+|dvips|. Unlike those engines, |xelatex| and |lualatex| support OpenType fonts, and that means that you can use system fonts in your documents relatively easy. Details will eventually be documented in this manual. For now, you can take a look at the documentation for the |fontspec| package which supports both engines. Also, note that when you use |lualatex| or |xelatex| with EU2 or EU1 encoding, respectively, by default you get OpenType Latin Modern fonts.
+Everything mentioned above applies to |pdflatex| and |latex|+|dvips|. Unlike those engines, |xelatex| and |lualatex| support OpenType fonts, and that means that you can use system fonts in your documents relatively easy. Details will eventually be documented in this manual. For now, you can take a look at the documentation for the |fontspec| package which supports both engines. Also, note that when you use |lualatex| or |xelatex| with TU encoding, respectively, by default you get OpenType Latin Modern fonts.
\subsection{Changing the Fonts Used for Different Elements of a Presentation}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-localstructure.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -614,7 +614,7 @@
You can define new environments using the following command:
\begin{command}{\newtheorem\opt{|*|}\marg{environment name}\oarg{numbered same as}\marg{head text}\oarg{number within}}
- This command is used exactly the same way as in the |amsthm| package (as a matter of fact, it is the command from that package), see its documentation. The only difference is that environments declared using this command are overlay specification-aware in \beamer\ and that, when typeset, are typeset according to \beamer's templates.
+ This command is used exactly the same way as in the |amsthm| package (as a matter of fact, it is the command from that package). For example, the two optional arguments, \meta{numbered same as} and \meta{number within}, are mutually exclusive; see the documentation of |amsthm| for details. The only difference is that environments declared using this command are overlay specification-aware in \beamer\ and that, when typeset, are typeset according to \beamer's templates.
\articlenote
Environments declared using this command are also overlay specification-aware in |article| mode.
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beamerug-nonpresentation.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -311,6 +311,8 @@
\emph{Note:} When a \TeX\ file ends, \TeX\ must not be in the gobbling state. Switch this state off using |\mode| on one line and |<all>| on the next.
+ \emph{Note:} The behavior of |\mode| command is different inside a frame: instead of line-wise gobbling, it puts every subsequent tokens inside a ``comment box'' until another |\mode| command is encountered. Some commands may cause errors in this situation, including the assignment of global variables and |\mode| of the first flavor, since they are not actually ``gobbled''. Please use |\mode| command \emph{of any flavor} outside frames.
+
\example
\begin{verbatim}
\mode<article>
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/beameruserguide.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@
\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\def\beamerugversion{3.56}
+\def\beamerugversion{3.57}
\def\beamerugpgfversion{1.00}
\def\beamerugxcolorversion{2.00}
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,293 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% Diese Datei enth\xE4lt eine L\xF6sungsvorlage f\xFCr:
-
-% - Vortr\xE4ge bei einer (deutschsprachigen) Konferenz/einem Kolloquium.
-% - Vortragsl\xE4nge von etwa 20 Minuten.
-% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschn\xF6rkelt/dekorativ.
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
-% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
-% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
-% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
-% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
-% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
-% notice.
-
-
-
-\mode<presentation>
-{
- \usetheme{Warsaw}
- % oder ...
-
- \setbeamercovered{transparent}
- % oder auch nicht
-}
-
-
-\usepackage[german]{babel}
-% oder was auch immer
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% oder was auch immer
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen
-% m\xFCssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile
-% mit fontenc zu l\xF6schen.
-
-
-\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln n\xF6tig)
-{Titel wie im Tagunsband angegeben\\ (u.U.\ also englisch)}
-
-\subtitle
-{Untertitel nur angeben, wenn es einen im Tagungsband gibt}
-
-\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren)
-{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}}
-% - Namen m\xFCssen in derselben Reihenfolge wie im Papier erscheinen.
-% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
-% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
-
-\institute[Universit\xE4ten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft n\xF6tig)
-{
- \inst{1}%
- Institut f\xFCr Informatik\\
- Universit\xE4t Hier
- \and
- \inst{2}%
- Institut f\xFCr theoretische Philosophie\\
- Universit\xE4t Dort}
-% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
-% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
-% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich f\xFCr die genau Adresse.
-
-\date[KPT 2003] % (optional, sollte der abgek\xFCrzte Konferenzname sein)
-{Konferenz \xFCber Pr\xE4sentationstechniken, 2004}
-% - Vollee oder abgek\xFCrzter Name sind m\xF6glich.
-% - Dieser Eintrag ist nicht f\xFCr das Publikum gedacht (das wei\xDF
-% n\xE4mlich, bei welcher Konferenz es ist), sondern f\xFCr Leute, die die
-% Folien sp\xE4ter lesen.
-
-\subject{Informatik}
-% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einf\xFCgt. Kann gut
-% weggelassen werden.
-
-
-% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden
-% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat
-% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einf\xFCgen:
-
-% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
-% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
-
-
-
-% Folgendes sollte gel\xF6scht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes
-% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen m\xF6chte.
-\AtBeginSubsection[]
-{
- \begin{frame}<beamer>{Gliederung}
- \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
- \end{frame}
-}
-
-
-% Falls Aufz\xE4hlungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann
-% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden:
-
-%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \titlepage
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Gliederung}
- \tableofcontents
- % Die Option [pausesections] k\xF6nnte n\xFCtzlich sein.
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-% Einen Vortrag zu strukturieren ist nicht immer einfach. Die
-% nachfolgende Struktur kann unangemessen sein. Hier ein paar Regeln,
-% die f\xFCr diese L\xF6sungsvorlage gelten:
-
-% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der
-% Zusammenfassung).
-% - *H\xF6chstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt.
-% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also
-% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben.
-
-% - Konferenzteilnehmer wissen oft wenig von der Materie des
-% Vortrags. Deshalb: vereinfachen!
-% - In 20 Minuten ist es schon schwer genug, die Hauptbotschaft zu
-% vermitteln. Deshalb sollten Details ausgelassen werden, selbst
-% wenn dies zu Ungenauigkeiten oder Halbwahrheiten f\xFChrt.
-% - Falls man Details wegl\xE4sst, die eigentlich wichtig f\xFCr einen
-% Beweis/Implementation sind, so sagt man dies einmal n\xFCchtern. Alle
-% werden damit gl\xFCcklich sein.
-
-\section{Motivation}
-
-\subsection{Das behandelte Problem}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.\\
- Korrekte Gro\xDF-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.}
- % - Eine \xDCberschrift fasst einen Rahmen verst\xE4ndlich zusammen. Man
- % muss sie verstehen k\xF6nnen, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des
- % Rahmens versteht.
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen.
- \item
- Sehr kurze S\xE4tze oder Satzglieder verwenden.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-
- Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots
- \begin{itemize}
- \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Erster Punkt.
- \pause
- \item
- Zweiter Punkt.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item<3->
- Erster Punkt.
- \item<4->
- Zweiter Punkt.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl:
- \begin{itemize}
- \uncover<5->{\item
- Erster Punkt.}
- \uncover<6->{\item
- Zweiter Punkt.}
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Fr\xFChere Arbeiten}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\section{Unsere Resultate/Beitrag}
-
-\subsection{Hauptresultate}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\subsection{Beweis-/Implementationsideen}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section*{Zusammenfassung}
-
-\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung}
-
- % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein.
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
- \item
- Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
- \item
- Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr.
- \end{itemize}
-
- % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional.
- \vskip0pt plus.5fill
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Ausblick
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Etwas, was wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
- \item
- Nochwas, das wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-% Alles nachfolgende ist optional und typischerweise nicht n\xF6tig.
-\appendix
-\section<presentation>*{\appendixname}
-\subsection<presentation>*{Weiterf\xFChrende Literatur}
-
-\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks]
- \frametitle<presentation>{Weiterf\xFChrende Literatur}
-
- \begin{thebibliography}{10}
-
- \beamertemplatebookbibitems
- % Anfangen sollte man mit \xDCbersichtswerken.
-
- \bibitem{Autor1990}
- A.~Autor.
- \newblock {\em Einf\xFChrung in das Pr\xE4sentationswesen}.
- \newblock Klein-Verlag, 1990.
-
-
- \beamertemplatearticlebibitems
- % Vertiefende Literatur kommt sp\xE4ter. Die Liste sollte kurz sein.
-
- \bibitem{Jemand2000}
- S.~Jemand.
- \newblock On this and that.
- \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100, 2000.
- \end{thebibliography}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,285 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% This file is a solution template for:
-
-% - Talk at a conference/colloquium.
-% - Talk length is about 20min.
-% - Style is ornate.
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
-% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
-% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
-% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
-% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
-% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
-% notice.
-
-
-\mode<presentation>
-{
- \usetheme{Warsaw}
- % or ...
-
- \setbeamercovered{transparent}
- % or whatever (possibly just delete it)
-}
-
-
-\usepackage[english]{babel}
-% or whatever
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% or whatever
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1
-% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc.
-
-
-\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles)
-{Title As It Is In the Proceedings}
-
-\subtitle
-{Include Only If Paper Has a Subtitle}
-
-\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors)
-{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}}
-% - Give the names in the same order as the appear in the paper.
-% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different
-% affiliation.
-
-\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed)
-{
- \inst{1}%
- Department of Computer Science\\
- University of Somewhere
- \and
- \inst{2}%
- Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\
- University of Elsewhere}
-% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations.
-% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address.
-
-\date[CFP 2003] % (optional, should be abbreviation of conference name)
-{Conference on Fabulous Presentations, 2003}
-% - Either use conference name or its abbreviation.
-% - Not really informative to the audience, more for people (including
-% yourself) who are reading the slides online
-
-\subject{Theoretical Computer Science}
-% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left
-% out.
-
-
-
-% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx
-% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex,
-% resp., then you can add a logo as follows:
-
-% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
-% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
-
-
-
-% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at
-% the beginning of each subsection:
-\AtBeginSubsection[]
-{
- \begin{frame}<beamer>{Outline}
- \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
- \end{frame}
-}
-
-
-% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment
-% the following command:
-
-%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \titlepage
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Outline}
- \tableofcontents
- % You might wish to add the option [pausesections]
-\end{frame}
-
-
-% Structuring a talk is a difficult task and the following structure
-% may not be suitable. Here are some rules that apply for this
-% solution:
-
-% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary).
-% - At *most* three subsections per section.
-% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about
-% 15 and 30 frames, all told.
-
-% - A conference audience is likely to know very little of what you
-% are going to talk about. So *simplify*!
-% - In a 20min talk, getting the main ideas across is hard
-% enough. Leave out details, even if it means being less precise than
-% you think necessary.
-% - If you omit details that are vital to the proof/implementation,
-% just say so once. Everybody will be happy with that.
-
-\section{Motivation}
-
-\subsection{The Basic Problem That We Studied}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.}
- % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion
- % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself.
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Use \texttt{itemize} a lot.
- \item
- Use very short sentences or short phrases.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-
- You can create overlays\dots
- \begin{itemize}
- \item using the \texttt{pause} command:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- First item.
- \pause
- \item
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- using overlay specifications:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item<3->
- First item.
- \item<4->
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- using the general \texttt{uncover} command:
- \begin{itemize}
- \uncover<5->{\item
- First item.}
- \uncover<6->{\item
- Second item.}
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Previous Work}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section{Our Results/Contribution}
-
-\subsection{Main Results}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Basic Ideas for Proofs/Implementation}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section*{Summary}
-
-\begin{frame}{Summary}
-
- % Keep the summary *very short*.
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
- \item
- The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
- \item
- Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that.
- \end{itemize}
-
- % The following outlook is optional.
- \vskip0pt plus.5fill
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Outlook
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Something you haven't solved.
- \item
- Something else you haven't solved.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-% All of the following is optional and typically not needed.
-\appendix
-\section<presentation>*{\appendixname}
-\subsection<presentation>*{For Further Reading}
-
-\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks]
- \frametitle<presentation>{For Further Reading}
-
- \begin{thebibliography}{10}
-
- \beamertemplatebookbibitems
- % Start with overview books.
-
- \bibitem{Author1990}
- A.~Author.
- \newblock {\em Handbook of Everything}.
- \newblock Some Press, 1990.
-
-
- \beamertemplatearticlebibitems
- % Followed by interesting articles. Keep the list short.
-
- \bibitem{Someone2000}
- S.~Someone.
- \newblock On this and that.
- \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100,
- 2000.
- \end{thebibliography}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,297 +0,0 @@
-% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% Ce fichier est un exemple d'expos\xE9
-
-% - pour des conf\xE9rences,
-% - d'une dur\xE9e approximative de 20 minutes,
-% - avec un style ornemental.
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa <philippejjg at free.fr>
-%
-% En principe, ce fichier peut \xEAtre redistribu\xE9 et/ou modifi\xE9 conform\xE9ment
-% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% Cependant, ce fichier est suppos\xE9 comme \xE9tant un "exemple-type" qui peut \xEAtre modifi\xE9
-% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu'
-% "exemple-type" et non sp\xE9cifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un
-% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et
-% de modifier ce fichier et m\xEAme d'effacer ce message de copyright.
-
-
-\mode<presentation> {
- \usetheme{Warsaw}
- % ou autre ...
-
- \setbeamercovered{transparent}
- % ou autre chose (il est \xE9galement possible de supprimer cette ligne)
-}
-
-
-\usepackage[french]{babel}
-% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel}
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% or autre
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent \xEAtre assortis. Si T1
-% ne para\xEEt pas tr\xE8s esth\xE9tique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc.
-
-
-\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long)
-{Tr\xE8s long titre qui prend de la place}
-
-\subtitle {ne compl\xE9ter que si l'article poss\xE8de un sous-titre}
-
-\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs)
-{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}}
-% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils appara\xEEtrons dans l'article
-% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations
-% diff\xE9rentes.
-
-\institute[Universit\xE9s de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais g\xE9n\xE9ralement n\xE9cessaire)
-{
- \inst{1}%
- D\xE9partement d'Informatique\\
- Universit\xE9 de Quelque Part
- \and
- \inst{2}%
- D\xE9partement de Philosophie Th\xE9orique\\
- Universit\xE9 d'Ailleurs}
-% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations
-% - Fa\xEEtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'int\xE9resse \xE0 votre adresse
-
-\date[CFP 2006] % (facultatif, peut \xEAtre une abr\xE9viation du nom de la conf\xE9rence)
-{Conf\xE9rence sur les Fantastiques Pr\xE9sentations, 2006}
-% - Utilisez \xE0 la fois le nom de la conf\xE9rence et son abr\xE9viation.
-% - N'a pas r\xE9ellement d'importance pour l'assistance qui sera pr\xE9sente lors de la conf\xE9rence,
-% mais en a surtout pour les personnes (y compris vous-m\xEAme) qui liront les transparents en ligne.
-
-\subject{La th\xE9orie de l'Informatique}
-% Ins\xE9r\xE9 uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut \xEAtre
-% supprim\xE9.
-
-
-
-% Si vous avez un fichier nomm\xE9 "universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier.xxx", o\xF9 xxx
-% est un format graphique accept\xE9 par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png),
-% alors vous pouvez ins\xE9rer votre logo ainsi :
-
-% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier}
-% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}}
-
-
-
-% \xC0 supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des mati\xE8res apparaisse
-% au d\xE9but de chaque sous-section :
-
-\AtBeginSubsection[] {
- \begin{frame}<beamer>{Lignes directrices}
- \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
- \end{frame}
-}
-
-% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un \xE0 un,
-% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel
-% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) :
-
-%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \titlepage
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices}
- \tableofcontents
- % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections]
-\end{frame}
-
-
-% Structurer l'entretien est une t\xE2che difficile et la structure suivante
-% pourrait ne pas convenir. Voici quelques r\xE8gles \xE0 appliquer pour cet
-% exemple ci :
-
-% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des mati\xE8res).
-% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section
-% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il
-% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant \xE9t\xE9 comment\xE9s.
-
-% - Le public d'une conf\xE9rence conna\xEEtra probablement peu de chose sur le sujet
-% que vous serez en train de traiter. Donc, *simplifiez* !
-% - Dans un expos\xE9 de 20 minutes, garder \xE0 l'esprit les id\xE9es principales est largement
-% suffisant pour votre assistance. Laissez tomber certains d\xE9tails, m\xEAme s'ils vous
-% semblent n\xE9cessaires.
-% - Si vous omettez un d\xE9tail qui est vital pour une preuve/mise en oeuvre,
-% dites le simplement une fois. Ce sera suffisant pour tout le monde.
-
-\section{Motivation}
-
-\subsection{Le probl\xE8me \xE9tudi\xE9}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.}
- % - Le titre doit r\xE9sumer le transparent dans un langage compr\xE9hensible
- % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent.
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} \xE0 volont\xE9.
- \item Utilisez des phrases tr\xE8s courtes et de courtes expressions.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent}
-
- Vous pouvez cr\xE9er des recouvrements\dots
- \begin{itemize}
- \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} :
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Premier item.
- \pause
- \item
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- en utilisant les sp\xE9cifications des recouvrements
- \begin{itemize}
- \item<3->
- Premier item.
- \item<4->
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- en utilisant en g\xE9n\xE9ral la commande \texttt{uncover} :
- \begin{itemize}
- \uncover<5->{\item
- Premier item.}
- \uncover<6->{\item
- Second item.}
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Travail pr\xE9alable}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super !
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment g\xE9nial !
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section{Nos r\xE9sultats/contribution}
-
-\subsection{Principaux r\xE9sultats}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- {\scshape Beamer} poss\xE8dent plusieurs th\xE8mes diff\xE9rents...
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- Merci \xE0 Till Tantau pour {\scshape Beamer} et son manuel.
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- Toute la puissance de \LaTeX{} pour cr\xE9er des pr\xE9sentations.
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Id\xE9es de bases pour les preuves}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- Une id\xE9e...
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- Une autre...
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- Et une derni\xE8re...
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section*{R\xE9sum\xE9}
-
-\begin{frame}{R\xE9sum\xE9}
-
- % Fa\xEEtes un r\xE9sum\xE9 *tr\xE8s court*.
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
- deux.
- \item
- Le \alert{deuxi\xE8me message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
- deux.
- \item
- Peut-\xEAtre un \alert{troisi\xE8me message}, mais pas plus que \xE7a.
- \end{itemize}
-
- % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives.
- \vskip0pt plus.5fill
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Perspectives
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
- \item
- Autre probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-% Tout ce qui suit est facultatif et n'est typiquement pas n\xE9cessaire.
-\appendix
-\section<presentation>*{\appendixname}
-\subsection<presentation>*{Lectures compl\xE9mentaires}
-
-\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks]
- \frametitle<presentation>{Lectures compl\xE9mentaires}
-
- \begin{thebibliography}{10}
-
- \beamertemplatebookbibitems
- % Commencer avec des livres (image d'un livre ins\xE9r\xE9e)
-
- \bibitem{Auteur1990}
- A.~Auteur.
- \newblock {\em Livre de quelque chose}.
- \newblock Une Edition, 1990.
-
-
- \beamertemplatearticlebibitems
- % Et continuer avec les articles (image d'un article incluse). Fa\xEEtes une liste br\xE8ve.
-
- \bibitem{Quelqu'un2000}
- S.~Quelqu'un.
- \newblock Et ceci et cela.
- \newblock {\em Journal de ceci et cela}, 2(1):50--100,
- 2000.
- \end{thebibliography}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified
+%
+% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
+% 2. under the GNU Public License.
+%
+% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
+
+% $Header$
+
+% This file is a demonstration on how a foils file should be
+% changed to make it work with beamer.
+
+% Copyright notice:
+
+% Since foiltex has a restricted license, I'm not able to include an
+% original example from foiltex. Instead, I'm providing a simple
+% example that shows the basic usage.
+
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+\usepackage{beamerfoils}
+\beamertemplatetheoremsnumbered
+
+\title{A Foils-To-Beamer Example}
+
+\author{Till Tantau}
+
+\MyLogo{\tiny-- Typeset by beamer emulation of \FoilTeX\ --}
+
+\leftheader{Till Tantau}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\frame{
+\maketitle
+}
+
+\foilhead{A first frame}
+
+Some text.
+
+\pagebreak
+
+More text on next slide.
+
+\foilhead{A third frame}
+
+Some text.
+
+\endfoil
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-foils.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified
+%
+% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
+% 2. under the GNU Public License.
+%
+% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
+
+% $Header$
+
+\documentclass[notes]{beamer}
+
+% You might wish to try this instead of the above line:
+%\documentclass[class=article]{beamer}
+%\usepackage{beamerbasearticle}
+%\usepackage{hyperref}
+
+\usepackage[framesassubsections]{beamerprosper}
+
+\mode<presentation>
+{
+ \definecolor{beamerstructure}{RGB}{43,79,112}
+ \definecolor{sidebackground}{RGB}{230,242,250}
+ \color{beamerstructure}
+ \usetheme{Goettingen}
+ \usepackage{times}
+ \userightsidebarcolortemplate{\color{sidebackground}}
+ \beamertemplateballitem
+}
+
+
+\title{A Beamer Presentation Using (HA-)Prosper Commands}
+\subtitle{Subtitles Are Also Supported}
+\author{Till Tantau}
+\institution{The Institution is Mapped To Institute}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\tsectionandpart{Introduction}
+
+\overlays{2}{
+\begin{slide}[trans=Glitter]{About this file}
+ \begin{itemstep}
+ \item
+ This is a beamer presentation.
+ \item
+ You can use the prosper and the HA-prosper syntax.
+ \item
+ This is done by mapping prosper and HA-prosper commands to beamer
+ commands.
+ \item
+ The emulation is by no means perfect.
+ \end{itemstep}
+\end{slide}
+}
+
+
+\section{Second Section}
+
+\subsection{A subsection}
+
+\frame
+{
+ \frametitle{A frame created using the \texttt{frame} command.}
+
+ \begin{itemize}[<+->]
+ \item You can still use the original beamer syntax.
+ \item The emulation is intended only to make recycling slides
+ easier, not to install a whole new syntax for beamer.
+ \end{itemize}
+}
+
+\begin{notes}{Notes for these slides}
+My notes for these slides.
+\end{notes}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-prosper.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+% $Header$
+
+% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be
+% changed to make it work with beamer.
+
+
+% Copyright notice:
+
+% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original
+% file semsamp2.tex, which is part of the examples of the seminar
+% package.
+
+
+%% BEGIN semsamp2.tex
+% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later).
+%
+% This file contains both landscape and portrait mode slides.
+% Choose one of the following to print them out:
+% - If using PSTricks, try the semcolor style option.
+% - If using Rokicki's dvips, try the semrot style option.
+% - To print the landscape slides, put \landscapeonly in the preamble.
+% To print the portrait slides, include the portrait style option and
+% put \portraitonly in the preamble.
+%
+%
+
+% CHANGED: commented the following:
+%\documentstyle[%
+% slidesonly,% Try notes or notesonly instead.
+% %notes,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset the notes.
+% %notesonly,% Use instead of slidesonly to typeset notes and slides.
+% %semcolor,% Try me if using PSTricks.
+% %semrot,% Try me if using Rokicki's dvips.
+% %semhelv,% Try me if using a PostScript printer.
+% %article,% Try me.
+% %portrait,% Try me.
+% %sem-a4,% Try me if using A4 paper.
+% semlayer% This must be included, but you need the semcolor option to
+% ]{seminar} % actually see the overlays.
+%
+%\slidesmag{5}
+%\articlemag{1}
+%
+%%\twoup % Try me for twoup printing.
+%
+%%\portraitonly % To print only portrait slides
+%%\landscapeonly % To print only landscape slides
+%
+%%\notslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: The slides are omitted.
+%%\onlyslides{\ref{questions}-7,1} %Try me: Only these slides are included.
+%%\onlynotestoo %Try me: For selecting notes as well.
+%
+%\colorlayers{red,blue} % Try deleting this if using the semcolor option,
+% % to get \blue and \red to use PostScript color.
+%
+%%\overlaysfalse % Suppress overlays with semcolor option.
+%%\layersfalse % Suppress color layers with semcolor option.
+%
+%\rotateheaderstrue % Try this out if using rotation macros.
+
+% CHANGED: Added following three lines:
+\documentclass[ignorenonframetext]{beamer}
+\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar}
+ % remove ``accumulated'' option
+ % for original behaviour
+\usepackage{beamerthemeclassic}
+
+\title{Example for seminar.sty}
+\author{Policarpa Salabarrieta}
+\date{July 21, 1991}
+
+\newcommand{\sref}[1]{SLIDE \ref{#1}}
+
+% CHANGED: different definition of \heading
+%\newcommand{\heading}[1]{\begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}}
+\let\heading=\frametitle
+
+% CHANGED: Commented:
+%\newpagestyle{MH}%
+% {University of Guaduas, March 13, 1998\hfil\thepage}{}
+%\pagestyle{MH}
+
+\begin{document}
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame
+\frame{
+\maketitle % This won't show up when \onlynotestoo is in effect.
+}
+
+% CHANGED: Commented
+%\begin{slide}
+% \ifslidesonly % Title slide only for slidesonly selection.
+% \maketitle
+% \addtocounter{slide}{-1}
+% \slidepagestyle{empty}
+% \fi
+%\end{slide}
+
+
+This is a lot of gobbledy-gook intended only to illustrate some of the
+features of seminar.sty.
+
+ The phrase information overload rings a bell with just about anyone.
+Certainly you all receive more working papers or more applications for
+graduate school than you can readily read. Nevertheless, the term information
+overload is ill-defined. (\sref{too_much}, top)
+
+ A message like this when you check your email conjures up the notion of
+information overload. More generally, information overload always means too
+much information, in some sense or another. But what does ``too much'' mean?
+(\sref{too_much}, bottom) It might just mean that people cannot process all
+the information they receive. That is certainly true for everyone. A claim
+that is much stronger, and that is implicit when people complain about
+information overload, is that people {\em should} receive less information, by
+some criterion.
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame
+\frame{
+\begin{slide}\label{too_much}%
+\begin{center}
+ \large\bf
+ Information overload = ``Too much'' information
+\end{center}
+\smallskip
+
+\begin{verse} \bf\tt
+ You have 134 unread messages:\\
+ Do you want to read them now?
+\end{verse}
+
+\begin{enumerate}
+ {\overlay2
+ \item People {\overlay1 cannot process all} the information they receive.}
+ \item People {\em should} receive less information.
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{slide}
+}
+
+ In this paper, I use the term ``information overload'' in both senses.
+(\sref{overload}, bottom). Specifically, I say that an {\em individual} is
+overloaded with information if she receives more information than she can
+process. But I say that there is information overload in a {\em network} if
+there is some mechanism that makes the senders and/or receivers better off by
+restricting the flow of information. This latter notion of information
+overload is an equilibrium property, and it depends on what we mean by
+``better off.''
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame
+\frame{
+\begin{slide*}\label{overload}
+\ptsize{12}
+
+\begin{itemize}{\overlay1
+ \item There is information {\overlay0 overload in a network if} there is
+some mechanism that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders
+and/or receivers better off by restricting the flow} of information.'
+
+ \item There is information overload in a network if there is some mechanism
+that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders and/or receivers
+better off by restricting the flow of information.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\end{slide*}
+}
+
+(\sref{questions})
+ The purpose of my paper is to show why there can be information overload in
+a network and what kind of mechanisms can make the receivers and/or senders
+better off. Since the cost of communication is one factor that restricts
+communication, I am thus also going to look at how the welfare of the senders
+and receivers depends on the cost of communication.
+
+ Most messages don't become jumbled and we can choose which ones to process.
+But some of us may have a bias towards choosing to process more information
+than we should, like the graduate student who feels compelled to read every
+article on the usual lengthy reading list, and just ends up getting confused
+and ruffling through the papers.
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame
+\frame{
+\begin{slide}[7.3in,5.5in] \label{questions}
+\heading{Questions}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+ {\overlay1\item When could {\blue there be overload} in networks?}
+ \item What mechanism make the receivers and senders better off?
+ \item How does the welfare {\red of the senders} and receivers depend on the
+cost of communication?
+\end{itemize}
+\end{slide}
+}
+
+However, experiments in consumer research and psychology have failed to find
+that such a bias is prevalent. This is in spite of the fact that it is common
+for stress and cognitive strain to increase with information load. We may
+incur such stress and strain because the information we choose to process is
+valuable to us.
+
+More commonly, then, we can and do choose to process roughly as much
+information as we can handle efficiently. This is called screening. But when
+we choose which messages to begin to process, we're ignorant of their
+contents, since otherwise there would be no reason to process them in the
+first place. Therefore, if we receive more junk mail, then some of the
+important mail gets crowded out, and we are effectively less informed.
+
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame
+\frame{
+\begin{slide} \label{informed}
+\begin{center}
+ {\bf Being more informed} \par
+ \smallskip
+ is always better,\par
+ \medskip
+ \overlay1{but it's not the same as \par
+ \smallskip
+ {\bf receiving more information}}
+\end{center}
+\end{slide}
+}
+
+ Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
+present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
+ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
+want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
+information. Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that
+sender will prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the
+sender has an interest in which messages the receiver processes.
+But when there are more senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the
+messages of the other senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't
+take this external cost into account when sending messages, they may
+collectively overload the receiver. (\sref{akbar})
+
+There are several reasons that our scarcity of attention, that is, our limited
+capacity to process information, can mean that we become less informed when we
+receive more information. I have a cartoon here to illustrate these reasons.
+(\sref{akbar})
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame
+\frame{
+\begin{slide}\label{akbar}\def\slidefuzz{15pt}
+ {\large A tax $\tau$ on communication is said to support
+$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is an equilibrium for
+$\Gamma(c+\tau)$.}
+\medskip
+
+ {\bf Proposition 6.} {\em Assume $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is not an equilibrium
+for $\Gamma(c)$.\vspace{-3pt}
+\begin{enumerate}
+ \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=[0,1]^n$, there is no tax that supports
+$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$.
+ \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=S^{n-1}$, there is a tax that supports
+$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if and only if $m=1$, $p_j>c\, \forall j$, and
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item $n=2$; or
+ \item $n=3$ and $p_i^{-1}+p_j^{-1}\geq p_k^{-1}$ for all distinct
+$i,j,k$; or
+ \item $n=4$ and $p_1=p_2=p_3=p_4$.
+\end{enumerate}
+\end{enumerate}}
+\end{slide}
+}
+ If, by restricting communication, we eliminate the less relevant messages,
+then we can become more informed. But how can we achieve this? Restricting the
+flow of information shifts the task of screening messages from the receivers
+to the senders. Unlike the receivers, the senders do know the contents of the
+messages they originate. If the senders' interests coincide with those of the
+receiver and if the senders have sufficient knowledge about the receivers,
+then the senders will choose the messages which are most relevant to the
+receivers. This may make the receivers, and even the senders, better off.
+
+ The network in Slide \ref{architectures} attains the minimal delay $c(8,24)
+= 6$ using 8 processors. It is an example of the efficient one-shot networks
+described by Foo. We will focus on a class of networks that are similar to the
+Foo networks but that may differ slightly. For $q$, $c$ and $n$ such that $1
+\leq q \leq \lfloor n/2 \rfloor$ and $c(q,n) \leq c \leq n$, let $R_{nqc}$ be
+the class of essential networks for adding $n$ items using $q$ processors in
+$c$ cycles that have the following properties:
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame
+\frame{
+\begin{slide*}\label{architectures}
+\heading{Architecture}
+
+\begin{center}
+\setlength{\unitlength}{1.65in}
+\begin{picture}(1.1,1.6)(3.5,5.0)
+\put(4.0,6.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,6.5){1}
+\put(4.0,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,6.0){2}
+\put(4.0,6.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\put(3.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(3.6,6.0){3}
+\put(3.6,6.1){\vector(1,1){.3}}
+\put(4.0,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,5.5){4}
+\put(4.0,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\put(4.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.6,6.0){5}
+\put(4.4,6.1){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
+\put(4.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.6,5.5){6}
+\put(4.4,5.6){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
+\put(3.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(3.6,5.5){7}
+\put(3.5,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\put(4.0,5.0){\circle*{.04}}
+\put(4.1,5.0){8}
+\put(4.0,5.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
+\end{picture}
+\end{center}
+\end{slide*}
+}
+
+Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
+present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
+ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
+want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
+information.
+
+Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that sender will
+prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the sender has
+an interest in which messages the receiver processes. But when there are more
+senders, one sender's messages tend to crowd out the messages of the other
+senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't take this external cost
+into account when sending messages, they may collectively overload the
+receiver. (\sref{architectures})
+
+\end{document}
+%% END semsamp2.tex
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-seminar.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+% $Header$
+
+% This file is a demonstration on how a seminar file should be
+% changed to make it work with beamer.
+
+
+% Copyright notice:
+
+% Except for the changes indicated by CHANGED, this file is the original
+% file texpower-0.0.9d/doc/seminardemo.tex, which is part of the
+% examples of the texpower package.
+
+
+
+% seminardemo.tex,v 1.2 2002/11/14 20:46:00 hansfn Exp
+%
+% TeXPower bundle - dynamic online presentations with LaTeX
+% Copyright (C) 1999-2002 Stephan Lehmke
+%
+% This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+% as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+% of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+% but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+% MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+% GNU General Public License for more details.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% File: seminardemo.tex
+%
+% Simple examples the for combining the seminar class with the dynamic features provided by the package texpower.sty.
+%
+%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% Autor: Stephan Lehmke <Stephan.Lehmke at cs.uni-dortmund.de>
+%
+% v0.0.1 Jun 02, 2000: First version for the pre-alpha release of TeXPower.
+%
+
+
+% CHANGED: commented
+%\documentclass{seminar}
+%
+%% We need fixseminar for setting the page size correctly.
+%
+%\usepackage{fixseminar}
+%
+%
+%%-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%% The texpower package is loaded.
+%% We give the display option so dynamic features are enabled.
+%%
+%\usepackage[display]{texpower}
+
+% CHANGED: Added
+\documentclass[slidestop,usepdftitle=false]{beamer}
+\usepackage[accumulated]{beamerseminar}
+\usepackage{beamertexpower}
+\usepackage{beamerthemeshadow}
+
+
+% CHANGED: Moved \title and \author outside of slide
+\title{The \code{texpower} Package\\ {\normalfont \texttt{seminar} Demo}}
+\author[Stephan Lehmke]{Stephan Lehmke\\\code{mailto:Stephan.Lehmke at cs.uni-dortmund.de}}
+
+\begin{document}
+\begin{slide}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\newslide
+
+\tableofcontents
+\end{slide}
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out, added \frametitle
+\section{A list environment}
+\frame{
+\begin{slide}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\frametitle{A list environment}
+
+% The \pause command `splits' the current page at the place it appears, producing two pages, one with everything which
+% came before the \pause command, one containing this and additionally the stuff coming after \pause. When these pages
+% are presented with acrobar reader in full screen mode (or any other viewer with this capability), the presentation
+% will appear to `stop' at the point the \pause command was issued and `resume' in the moment the presenter switches to
+% the next page.
+
+\pause
+
+% As \pause forces a paragraph break, it can not be used to separate a description label from the associated text. For
+% this, we use the (very flexible) \stepwise command. Inside the argument of \stepwise, an arbitrary number of \step
+% commands may occur. \stepwise will produce as many pages as there are \step commands, making the arguments of the
+% \step commands appear ``one by one''.
+
+\stepwise
+{%
+ \begin{description}
+ \item[foo.] \step{bar.}
+ \step{\item[baz.]} \step{qux.}
+ \end{description}
+ }
+
+
+
+\end{slide}
+}
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out
+\section{An aligned equation}
+\frame{
+\begin{slide}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\frametitle{An aligned equation}
+
+\pause
+
+% Normally for \stepwise, if a \step is not yet active, its argument is ignored completely. This would disturb
+% alignments, because the width changes with every new activated \step.
+% \parstepwise is a variant of \stepwise where the argument of an inactive \step is put into a \phantom, leaving the
+% proper amount of white space.
+
+\parstepwise
+{%
+ % Using eqnarray with equation numbers here means all equation numbers will be visible from the outset, because only
+ % the contents of the lines are `filled in'. See the full demo for an example of aligned equations where equation
+ % numbers `appear'.
+ \begin{eqnarray}
+ %
+ % When the argument of \step is put into a box (as it happens with \parstepwise), tabulators can not go in there. As
+ % we want the equals sign to appear at the same time as the right side of the equation, we use \restep for the
+ % latter. \restep is like \step, but it appears at the same time as the previous \step command.
+ %
+ \sum_{i=1}^{n} i & \step{=} & \restep{1 + 2 + \cdots + (n-1) + n}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{1 + n + 2 + (n-1) + \cdots}\\
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep
+ {% We can nest \step commands inside each other. The order of execution is just the
+ % order of appearance, independent of nesting.
+ % \switch is a variant of \step which takes two arguments and toggles between them on
+ % activation. This way, we can make the \underbrace `appear'.
+ % We insert a \vphantom in the first argument so that the equation numbers will be
+ % placed correctly whether or not the underbrace is didplayed.
+ \switch
+ {%
+ \vphantom{\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ (1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)%
+ }
+ {\underbrace{(1 + n) + \cdots + (1 + n)}_{\times\frac{n}{2}}}%
+ }
+ \\
+ %
+ % This is another nested application of \step. Note that the spacing of \cdot has to be corrected manually by
+ % inserting {} left of it, because otherwise it would behave like a prefix operator.
+ %
+ & \step{=} & \restep{\frac{(1 + n)\step{{}\cdot n}}{\restep{2}}}
+ \end{eqnarray}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\end{slide}
+}
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out
+\section{An array}
+\frame{
+\begin{slide}
+ \centerslidesfalse
+ \frametitle{An array}
+
+\stepwise
+{% With arrays, beware of problems with automatic calculation of cell widths.
+ %
+ % If you want all widths to be calculated automatically, you need to use \parstepwise, with the consequence that
+ % a) tabulators or newlines can not go into the argument of \step,
+ % b) the array `structure' (rules) will be completely visible right from the beginning.
+ %
+ % If you want to use \stepwise for being able to build the `structure' (like \hilne's) dynamically (as done in the
+ % following), you have to make sure that the cell widths are correct from the very first line, because otherwise the
+ % array will expand horizontally, destroying the dynamic effect. This can be assured by
+ % a) using only p cells,
+ % b) making sure all the cells in the first line are at least as wide as the widest cell which will appear later. If
+ % you are using the calc package, this is easiest by putting \makebox[\widthof{widest entry}]{first entry} into
+ % the first cell. Otherwise, you can use \settowidth.
+ %
+ \begin{displaymath}
+ \begin{array}{rrrrr}
+ \step
+ {%
+ n & \log n & n\log n & \lefteqn{n^2}\phantom{25} & \lefteqn{2^n}\phantom{32} \\
+ \hline%
+ }%
+ \step{0 &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{\textrm{---} &} \step{0 &} \step{1 \\}%
+ \step{1 &} \step{0\phantom{.6} &} \step{0\phantom{.8} &} \step{1 &} \step{2 \\}%
+ \step{2 &} \step{1\phantom{.6} &} \step{2\phantom{.8} &} \step{4 &} \step{4 \\}%
+ \step{3 &} \step{1.6 &} \step{4.8 &} \step{9 &} \step{8 \\}%
+ \step{4 &} \step{2\phantom{.6} &} \step{8\phantom{.8} &} \step{16 &} \step{16 \\}%
+ \step{5 &} \step{2.3 &} \step{11.6 &} \step{25 &} \step{32 }%
+ \end{array}
+ \end{displaymath}
+}
+
+
+
+
+\end{slide}
+}
+
+% CHANGED: Added \frame, moved \section out
+\section{A picture}
+\frame{
+\begin{slide}
+\centerslidesfalse
+\frametitle{A picture}
+
+\pause
+
+\begin{center}%
+ \stepwise
+ {%
+ \setlength{\unitlength}{1.5\semcm}%
+ \delimitershortfall-1sp% Just for the nested braces
+ \begin{picture}(14,2)
+ \put(0,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(0.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $x(t)$}}
+ \put(13,1){\vector(1,0){1}}
+ \put(13.5,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $y(t)$}}
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(1,1){\line(3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(2.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(2,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\varphi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(2.5,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ \put(4.25,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\small $F_t = \varphi\left(x(t)\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(6,0){\framebox(2,2){\large $\Phi$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(8,1){\vector(1,0){3.5}}
+ %
+ % Here, we find another nested use of \step inside \step.
+ % \bstep is a variant of \step which _always_ puts its argument into a box for leaving the correct amount of
+ % white space. We cannot use \parstepwise here because \put can't go into a box. Hence, just using \step for
+ % building the nested formula on the next line would give the wrong size for the nested braces.
+ %
+ \put(9.75,0.5){\makebox(0,0){\footnotesize $G_t = \Phi\left(\bstep{\varphi\left(\bstep{x(t)}\right)}\right)$}}
+ }
+ \step
+ {
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,2){1.5}}
+ \put(13,1){\line(-3,-2){1.5}}
+ \put(11.5,0){\line(0,1){2}}
+ \put(12,1){\makebox(0,0){\large $\delta$}}
+ }
+ \end{picture}%
+ }%
+\end{center}%
+\end{slide}
+}
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/emulation-examples/beamerexample-texpower.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,744 @@
+% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified
+%
+% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
+% 2. under the GNU Public License.
+%
+% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
+
+
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+%
+% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS\xA1!!
+%
+% Use a file in the directory solutions instead.
+% They are much better suited.
+%
+
+
+% Setup appearance:
+
+\usetheme{Darmstadt}
+\usefonttheme[onlylarge]{structurebold}
+\setbeamerfont*{frametitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\bfseries}
+\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{}
+
+
+% Standard packages
+
+\usepackage[english]{babel}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+
+
+% Setup TikZ
+
+\usepackage{tikz}
+\usetikzlibrary{arrows}
+\tikzstyle{block}=[draw opacity=0.7,line width=1.4cm]
+
+
+% Author, Title, etc.
+
+\title[Block Partitioning and Perfect Phylogenies]
+{%
+ On the Complexity of SNP Block Partitioning Under the Perfect
+ Phylogeny Model%
+}
+
+\author[Gramm, Hartman, Nierhoff, Sharan, Tantau]
+{
+ Jens~Gramm\inst{1} \and
+ Tzvika~Hartman\inst{2} \and
+ Till~Nierhoff\inst{3} \and
+ Roded~Sharan\inst{4} \and
+ \textcolor{green!50!black}{Till~Tantau}\inst{5}
+}
+
+\institute[T\xFCbingen and others]
+{
+ \inst{1}%
+ Universit\xE4t T\xFCbingen, Germany
+ \and
+ \vskip-2mm
+ \inst{2}%
+ Bar-Ilan University, Ramat-Gan, Israel
+ \and
+ \vskip-2mm
+ \inst{3}%
+ International Computer Science Institute, Berkeley, USA
+ \and
+ \vskip-2mm
+ \inst{4}%
+ Tel-Aviv University, Israel
+ \and
+ \vskip-2mm
+ \inst{5}%
+ Universit\xE4t zu L\xFCbeck, Germany
+}
+
+\date[WABI 2006]
+{Workshop on Algorithms in Bioinformatics, 2006}
+
+
+
+% The main document
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \titlepage
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Outline}
+ \tableofcontents
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+\subsection{The Model and the Problem}
+
+\begin{frame}{What is haplotyping and why is it important?}
+ You hopefully know this after the previous three talks\dots
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}[t]{General formalization of haplotyping.}
+ \begin{block}{Inputs}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \alert{genotype matrix} $G$.
+ \item The \alert{rows} of the matrix are \alert{taxa / individuals}.
+ \item The \alert{columns} of the matrix are \alert{SNP sites /
+ characters}.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+ \begin{block}{Outputs}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A \alert{haplotype matrix} $H$.
+ \item Pairs of rows in $H$ \alert{explain} the rows of $G$.
+ \item The haplotypes in $H$ are \alert{biologically plausible}.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}[t]{Our formalization of haplotyping.}
+ \begin{block}{Inputs}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A genotype matrix $G$.
+ \item The rows of the matrix are individuals / taxa.
+ \item The columns of the matrix are SNP sites / characters.
+ \item<alert at 1->
+ The problem is directed: one haplotype is known.
+ \item<alert at 1->
+ The input is biallelic: there are only two homozygous
+ states (0 and 1) and one heterozygous state (2).
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+ \begin{block}{Outputs}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item A haplotype matrix $H$.
+ \item Pairs of rows in $H$ explain the rows of $G$.
+ \item<alert at 1> The haplotypes in $H$ form a perfect phylogeny.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{We can do perfect phylogeny haplotyping efficiently, but
+ \dots}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item \alert{Data may be missing.}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item This makes the problem NP-complete \dots
+ \item \dots even for very restricted cases.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Additional assumption like the rich data hypothesis.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item \alert{No perfect phylogeny is possible.}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item This can be caused by chromosomal crossing-over effects.
+ \item This can be caused by incorrect data.
+ \item This can be caused by multiple mutations at the same sites.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \textcolor{green!50!black}{Solutions:}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Look for phylogenetic networks.
+ \item Correct data.
+ \item<alert at 1->
+ Find blocks where a perfect phylogeny is possible.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{The Integrated Approach}
+
+\begin{frame}{How blocks help in perfect phylogeny haplotyping.}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Partition the site set into overlapping contiguous blocks.
+ \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them.
+ \item Use dynamic programming for finding the partition.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \begin{tikzpicture}
+ \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2);
+
+ \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm]
+ (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix}
+ (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666)
+ (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333)
+ (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}};
+
+ \begin{scope}[xshift=-.5mm]
+ \only<2->
+ {
+ \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5)
+ node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny};
+ }
+
+ \only<3->
+ {
+ \draw[green!50!black,block] (2.5,.5) -- (7,.5)
+ node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny};
+ }
+
+ \only<4->
+ {
+ \draw[blue,block] (6.5,.5) -- (10,.5)
+ node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny};
+ }
+ \end{scope}
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Objective of the integrated approach.}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Partition the site set into \alert{noncontiguous} blocks.
+ \item Compute a perfect phylogeny for each block and combine them.
+ \item<alert at 1-> Compute partition while computing perfect
+ phylogenies.
+ \end{enumerate}
+
+ \begin{tikzpicture}
+ \useasboundingbox (0,-1) rectangle (10,2);
+
+ \draw[line width=2mm,dash pattern=on 1mm off 1mm]
+ (0,1) -- (9.99,1) node[midway,above] {Genotype matrix}
+ (0,0.6666) -- (9.99,0.6666)
+ (0,0.3333) -- (9.99,0.3333)
+ (0,0) -- (9.99,0) node[midway,below] {\only<1>{no perfect phylogeny}};
+
+ \only<2->
+ {
+ \begin{scope}[xshift=-0.5mm]
+ \draw[red,block] (0,.5) -- (3,.5)
+ node[midway,below] {perfect phylogeny}
+ (8,.5) -- (9,.5);
+
+ \draw[green!50!black,block]
+ (3,.5) -- (6,.5)
+ node[pos=0.6,below] {perfect phylogeny}
+ (6.4,.5) -- (8,.5)
+ (9,.5) -- (10,.5);
+
+ \draw[blue,block] (6,.5) -- (6.4,.5)
+ node[midway,below=5mm] {perfect phylogeny};
+ \end{scope}
+ }
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{The formal computational problem.}
+ We are interested in the computational complexity of \\
+ \alert{the function \alert{$\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$}}:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item It gets genotype matrices as input.
+ \item It maps them to a number $k$.
+ \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be
+ covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect phylogeny.
+ \\
+ (We call this a \alert{pp-partition}.)
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\section{Bad News: Hardness Results}
+
+\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Haplotype Matrices}
+
+\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
+ We start with a special case:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{already haplotype matrices}.
+ \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}.
+ \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$?
+ \end{itemize}
+ \begin{example}
+ \begin{columns}
+ \column{.3\textwidth}
+ $M\colon$
+ \footnotesize
+ \begin{tabular}{cccc}
+ 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 0 & 1 \\
+ 1 & 1 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\
+ 1 & 0 & 1 & 0
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \only<2>
+ {%
+ \begin{tikzpicture}
+ \useasboundingbox (2.9,0);
+
+ \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.9) -- (1.7 ,-1.7);
+ \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.9) -- (0.85,-1.7)
+ (2.55,1.9) -- (2.55,-1.7);
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+ }
+ \column{.6\textwidth}
+ \begin{overprint}
+ \onslide<1>
+ No perfect phylogeny is possible.
+
+ \onslide<2>
+ \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
+
+ \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
+
+ $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$.
+
+ \end{overprint}
+ \end{columns}
+ \end{example}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
+ \begin{theorem}
+ Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of haplotype matrices}\\
+ is equivalent to finding \alert{optimal graph colorings}.
+ \end{theorem}
+
+ \begin{proof}[Proof sketch for first direction]
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Let $G$ be a graph.
+ \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$.
+ \item For each edge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\the
+ submatrix $\left(
+ \begin{smallmatrix}
+ 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 1 \\
+ 1 & 0 \\
+ 1 & 1
+ \end{smallmatrix}\right)$.
+ \item The submatrix enforces that the columns lie in different
+ perfect phylogenies. \qedhere
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{proof}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
+ \begin{corollary}
+ If $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a haplotype matrix $M$,
+ we can find an optimal pp-partition in polynomial time.
+ \end{corollary}
+
+ \begin{corollary}
+ Computing $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}$ for haplotype matrices is
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard,
+ \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless
+ $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$,
+ \item very hard to approximate.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{corollary}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Hardness of PP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Finding pp-partitions of genotype matrices.}
+ Now comes the general case:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The inputs $M$ are \alert{genotype matrices}.
+ \item The inputs $M$ \alert{do not allow a perfect phylogeny}.
+ \item What is $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M)$?
+ \end{itemize}
+ \begin{example}
+ \begin{columns}
+ \column{.3\textwidth}
+ $M\colon$
+ \footnotesize
+ \begin{tabular}{cccc}
+ 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\
+ 1 & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 0 & 0 & 1 \\
+ 0 & 0 & 1 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 \\
+ 1 & 1 & 0 & 0
+ \end{tabular}%
+ \only<2>
+ {%
+ \begin{tikzpicture}
+ \useasboundingbox (2.9,0);
+
+ \draw [red, opacity=0.7,line width=1cm] (1.7 ,1.3) -- (1.7 ,-1.1);
+ \draw [blue,opacity=0.7,line width=5mm] (0.85,1.3) -- (0.85,-1.1)
+ (2.55,1.3) -- (2.55,-1.1);
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+ }
+ \column{.6\textwidth}
+ \begin{overprint}
+ \onslide<1>
+ No perfect phylogeny is possible.
+
+ \onslide<2>
+ \textcolor{blue!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
+
+ \textcolor{red!70!bg}{Perfect phylogeny}
+
+ $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$.
+
+ \end{overprint}
+ \end{columns}
+ \end{example}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Bad news about pp-partitions of haplotype matrices.}
+ \begin{theorem}
+ Finding \alert{optimal pp-partition of genotype matrices}
+ is at least as hard as finding \alert{optimal colorings of
+ 3-uniform hypergraphs}.
+ \end{theorem}
+
+ \begin{proof}[Proof sketch]
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Let $G$ be a 3-uniform hypergraph.
+ \item Build a matrix with a column for each vertex of $G$.
+ \item For each hyperedge of $G$ add four rows inducing\\ the submatrix
+ $\left(
+ \begin{smallmatrix}
+ 2 & 2 & 2 \\
+ 1 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 0 & 1
+ \end{smallmatrix}\right)
+ $.
+ \item The submatrix enforces that the three columns do not all lie
+ in the same perfect phylogeny. \qedhere
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{proof}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Implications for pp-partitions of genotype matrices.}
+ \begin{corollary}
+ Even if we know $\chi_{\operatorname{PP}}(M) = 2$ for a genotype matrix $M$,\\
+ finding a pp-partition of any fixed size is still
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item $\operatorname{NP}$-hard,
+ \item not fixed-parameter tractable, unless
+ $\operatorname{P}=\operatorname{NP}$,
+ \item very hard to approximate.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{corollary}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\section{Good News: Tractability Results}
+
+\subsection{Perfect Path Phylogenies}
+
+\begin{frame}{Automatic optimal pp-partitioning is hopeless, but\dots}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item The hardness results are \alert{worst-case} results for\\
+ \alert{highly artificial inputs}.
+ \item \alert{Real biological data} might have special properties
+ that make the problem \alert{tractable}.
+ \item One such property is that perfect phylogenies are often
+ perfect \alert{path} phylogenies:
+
+ In HapMap data, in 70\% of the blocks where a perfect phylogeny
+ is possible a perfect path phylogeny is also possible.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Example of a perfect path phylogeny.}
+ \begin{columns}[t]
+ \column{.3\textwidth}
+ \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix}
+ $G\colon$
+ \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+ A & B & C \\\hline
+ 2 & 2 & 2 \\
+ 0 & 2 & 0 \\
+ 2 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 2 & 2
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{exampleblock}
+
+ \column{.3\textwidth}
+ \begin{exampleblock}{Haplotype matrix}
+ $H\colon$
+ \begin{tabular}{ccc}
+ A & B & C \\\hline
+ 1 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 1 \\
+ 0 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 1 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 0 & 0 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 1
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{exampleblock}
+
+ \column{.4\textwidth}
+ \begin{exampleblock}{Perfect path phylogeny}
+ \begin{center}
+ \begin{tikzpicture}[auto,thick]
+ \tikzstyle{node}=%
+ [%
+ minimum size=10pt,%
+ inner sep=0pt,%
+ outer sep=0pt,%
+ ball color=example text.fg,%
+ circle%
+ ]
+
+ \node [node] {} [->]
+ child {node [node] {} edge from parent node[swap]{A}}
+ child {node [node] {}
+ child {node [node] {} edge from parent node{C}}
+ edge from parent node{B}
+ };
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+ \end{center}
+ \end{exampleblock}
+ \end{columns}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{The modified formal computational problem.}
+ We are interested in the computational complexity of \\
+ the function $\chi_{\alert{\operatorname{PPP}}}$:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item It gets genotype matrices as input.
+ \item It maps them to a number $k$.
+ \item This number is minimal such that the sites can be
+ covered by $k$ sets, each admitting a perfect \alert{path} phylogeny.
+ \\
+ (We call this a ppp-partition.)
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Tractability of PPP-Partitioning of Genotype Matrices}
+
+\begin{frame}{Good news about ppp-partitions of genotype matrices.}
+ \begin{theorem}
+ \alert{Optimal ppp-partitions of genotype matrices} can be
+ computed in \alert{polynomial time}.
+ \end{theorem}
+ \begin{block}{Algorithm}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Build the following partial order:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Can one column be above the other in a phylogeny?
+ \item Can the columns be the two children of the root of a
+ perfect path phylogeny?
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item Cover the partial order with as few compatible chain pairs
+ as possible.
+
+ For this, a maximal matching in a special graph needs to be
+ computed.
+ \end{enumerate}
+ \end{block}
+ \hyperlink{algorithm<1>}{\beamergotobutton{The algorithm in action}}
+ \hypertarget{return}{}
+\end{frame}
+
+\section*{Summary}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \frametitle<presentation>{Summary}
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Finding optimal pp-partitions is \alert{intractable}.
+ \item
+ It is even intractable to find a pp-partition when \alert{just two
+ noncontiguous blocks are known to suffice}.
+ \item
+ For perfect \alert{path} phylogenies, optimal partitions can be
+ computed \alert{in polynomial time}.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\appendix
+
+\section*{Appendix}
+
+\begin{frame}[label=algorithm]{The algorithm in action.}{Computation of
+ the partial order.}
+ \begin{columns}[t]
+ \column{.4\textwidth}
+ \begin{exampleblock}{Genotype matrix}
+ $G\colon$
+ \begin{tabular}{ccccc}
+ A & B & C & D & E \\\hline
+ 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 & 2 \\
+ 0 & 1 & 2 & 1 & 0 \\
+ 1 & 0 & 0 & 1 & 2 \\
+ 0 & 2 & 2 & 0 & 0
+ \end{tabular}
+ \end{exampleblock}
+ \column{.6\textwidth}
+ \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order}
+ \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm]
+ \tikzstyle{every node}=
+ [%
+ fill=green!50!black!20,%
+ draw=green!50!black,%
+ minimum size=7mm,%
+ circle,%
+ thick%
+ ]
+
+ \node (A) {A};
+ \node (B) [right of=A] {B};
+ \node (C) [below of=B] {C};
+ \node (D) [above of=A] {D};
+ \node (E) [below of=A] {E};
+
+ \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E)
+ (B) edge (C)
+ (D) edge (A)
+ edge[bend right] (E);
+
+ \uncover<2>{
+ \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B)
+ edge (C)
+ (B) edge (E)
+ (C) edge (E);}
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+
+ Partial order: \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick,-stealth'] (0pt,.5ex)
+ -- (5mm,.5ex);
+
+ \uncover<2>{\textcolor{blue}{Compatible as children of root:
+ \tikz[baseline] \draw[thick] (0pt,.5ex) -- (5mm,.5ex);}}
+ \end{exampleblock}
+ \end{columns}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{The algorithm in action.}{The matching in the special graph.}
+ \begin{columns}[t]
+ \column{.3\textwidth}
+ \begin{exampleblock}{Partial order}
+ \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm]
+ \tikzstyle{every node}=%
+ [%
+ fill=green!50!black!20,%
+ draw=green!50!black,%
+ minimum size=8mm,%
+ circle,%
+ thick%
+ ]
+
+ \node (A) {$A$};
+ \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$};
+ \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$};
+ \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$};
+ \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$};
+
+ \path [thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth'] (A) edge (E)
+ (B) edge (C)
+ (D) edge (A)
+ edge[bend right] (E);
+
+ \path [-,blue,thick](A) edge (B)
+ edge (C)
+ (B) edge (E)
+ (C) edge (E);
+
+ \only<3->
+ {
+ \path[very thick,shorten >=1pt,-stealth',red] (D) edge (A) (B) edge (C);
+ \path [-,red,very thick](E) edge (B);
+ }
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+ \end{exampleblock}
+ \column{.7\textwidth}
+ \begin{exampleblock}{Matching graph}
+ \begin{tikzpicture}[node distance=15mm]
+ \tikzstyle{every node}=%
+ [%
+ fill=green!50!black!20,%
+ draw=green!50!black,%
+ minimum size=8mm,%
+ circle,%
+ thick,%
+ inner sep=0pt%
+ ]
+
+ \node (A) {$A$};
+ \node (B) [right of=A] {$B$};
+ \node (C) [below of=B] {$C$};
+ \node (D) [above of=A] {$D$};
+ \node (E) [below of=A] {$E$};
+
+ \begin{scope}[xshift=4.75cm]
+ \node (A') {$A'$};
+ \node (B') [right of=A'] {$B'$};
+ \node (C') [below of=B'] {$C'$};
+ \node (D') [above of=A'] {$D'$};
+ \node (E') [below of=A'] {$E'$};
+ \end{scope}
+
+ \path [thick] (A) edge (E')
+ (B) edge (C')
+ (D) edge (A')
+ edge (E');
+
+ \path [blue,thick](A') edge (B')
+ edge (C')
+ (B') edge (E')
+ (C') edge (E');
+
+ \only<2->
+ {
+ \path[very thick,red] (D) edge (A')
+ (B) edge (C')
+ (B') edge (E');
+ }
+ \end{tikzpicture}
+ \end{exampleblock}
+ \end{columns}
+
+ \medskip
+ \uncover<2->{A \alert{maximal matching} in the matching graph
+ \uncover<3>{induces\\ \alert{perfect path phylogenies}.}}
+
+ \hfill\hyperlink{return}{\beamerreturnbutton{Return}}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-conference-talk/beamerexample-conference-talk.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified
+%
+% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
+% 2. under the GNU Public License.
+%
+% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
+
+\documentclass[german,10pt]{beamer}
+
+\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex}
+\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,587 @@
+% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified
+%
+% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
+% 2. under the GNU Public License.
+%
+% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
+
+%
+% DO NOT USE THIS FILE AS A TEMPLATE FOR YOUR OWN TALKS\xA1!!
+%
+% Use a file in the directory solutions instead.
+% They are much better suited.
+%
+
+
+\lecture[1]{Syntax versus Semantik}{lecture-text}
+
+\subtitle{Text und seine Bedeutung}
+
+\date{27. Oktober 2006}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \maketitle
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\section*{Ziele und Inhalt}
+
+\begin{frame}{Die Lernziele der heutigen Vorlesung und der \xDCbungen.}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Die Begriffe Syntax und Semantik erkl\xE4ren k\xF6nnen
+ \item Syntaktische und semantische Elemente nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen und
+ von Programmiersprachen benennen k\xF6nnen
+ \item Die Begriffe Alphabet und Wort kennen
+ \item Objekte als Worte kodieren k\xF6nnen
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}\frametitle<presentation>{Gliederung}
+ \tableofcontents
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\section{Was ist Syntax?}
+
+\begin{frame}{Die zwei Hauptbegriffe der heutigen Vorlesung.}
+ \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Syntax)}
+ Unter einer \alert{Syntax} verstehen wir \alert{Regeln}, nach denen
+ Texte \alert{strukturiert} werden d\xFCrfen.
+ \end{block}
+ \begin{block}{Grobe Definition (Semantik)}
+ Unter einer \alert{Semantik} verstehen wir die Zuordnung von
+ \alert{Bedeutung} zu Text.
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection[Syntax \protect\\ nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen]{Syntax nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen}
+
+\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem \xE4gyptischen Text.}
+ \includegraphicscopyright[width=6cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg}
+ {Copyright by Guillaume Blanchard, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion}
+
+ \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet.
+ \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden,
+ wie \xBBHieroglyphen stehen in Zeilen\xAB.
+ \item Solche Regeln sind \alert{syntaktische Regeln} -- man kann sie
+ \xFCberpr\xFCfen, ohne den Inhalt zu verstehen.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem kyrillischen Text.}
+
+ \includegraphicscopyright[width=6.75cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg}
+ {Copyright by Cristian Chirita, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resultion}
+
+ \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Wir haben keine Ahnung, was der Text bedeutet.
+ \item Es gibt aber \alert{Regeln}, die offenbar eingehalten wurden.
+ \item Wir kennen mehr Regeln als bei den Hieroglyphen.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+
+ \begin{block}{Zur Diskussion}
+ Welche syntaktischen Regeln fallen Ihnen ein, die bei dem Text
+ eingehalten wurden?
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einem deutschen Text.}
+ \begin{quotation}
+ Informatiker lieben Logiker.
+ \end{quotation}
+
+ \bigskip
+ \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Auch hier werden viele syntaktische Regeln eingehalten.
+ \item Es f\xE4llt uns aber \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen.
+ \item Der Grund ist, dass wir \alert{sofort \xFCber die Bedeutung
+ nachdenken}.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von nat\xFCrlichen Sprachen.}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Die \alert{Syntax} einer nat\xFCrlichen Sprache ist die Menge an
+ \alert{Regeln}, nach denen S\xE4tze gebildet werden d\xFCrfen.
+ \item
+ Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der gebildeten S\xE4tze
+ ist dabei unerheblich.
+ \item
+ Jede Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax verschiedener
+ Sprachen \xE4hneln sich aber oft.
+ \item
+ Es ist nicht immer klar, ob eine Regel noch zur Syntax geh\xF6rt
+ oder ob es schon um den Sinn geht.
+
+ \ExampleInline{Substantive werden gro\xDF geschrieben.}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\subsection{Syntax von Programmiersprachen}
+
+\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem Programmtext.}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\def\pgfpointadd#1#2{%
+ \pgf at process{#1}%
+ \pgf at xa=\pgf at x%
+ \pgf at ya=\pgf at y%
+ \pgf at process{#2}%
+ \advance\pgf at x by\pgf at xa%
+ \advance\pgf at y by\pgf at ya}
+\end{verbatim}
+ \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Der Programmtext sieht sehr kryptisch aus.
+ \item Trotzdem gibt es offenbar wieder Regeln.
+ \item So scheint einem Doppelkreuz eine Ziffer zu folgen und
+ Zeilen muss man offenbar mit Prozentzeichen beenden.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}[fragile]{Beobachtungen zu einem weiteren Programmtext.}
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
+ a[i] = a[i];
+\end{verbatim}
+ \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Wieder gibt es Regeln, die eingehalten werden.
+ \item Wieder f\xE4llt es uns \alert{schwerer}, diese zu erkennen, da
+ wir \alert{sofort \xFCber den Sinn nachdenken}.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von Programmiersprachen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer Programmiersprache ist die
+ \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Programmtexte gebildet werden
+ d\xFCrfen.
+ \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Programmtexte
+ ist dabei egal.
+ \item
+ Jede Programmiersprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax
+ verschiedener Sprachen \xE4hneln sich aber oft.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe}
+ Welche der folgenden Regeln sind Syntax-Regeln?
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Bezeichner d\xFCrfen nicht mit einer Ziffer anfangen.
+ \item Programme m\xFCssen in endlicher Zeit ein Ergebnis produzieren.
+ \item \xD6ffnende und schlie\xDFende geschweifte Klammern m\xFCssen
+ \xBBbalanciert\xAB sein.
+ \item Methoden von Null-Objekten d\xFCrfen nicht aufgerufen werden.
+ \item Variablen m\xFCssen vor ihrer ersten Benutzung deklariert werden.
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection[Syntax\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Syntax logischer Sprachen}
+
+\begin{frame}{Beobachtungen zu einer logischen Formel.}
+ \begin{quotation}
+ $p \to q \land \neg q$
+ \end{quotation}
+
+ \bigskip
+ \begin{block}{Beobachtungen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Auch logische Formeln haben eine syntaktische Struktur.
+ \item So w\xE4re es \alert{syntaktisch falsch}, statt einem Pfeil zwei
+ Pfeile zu benutzen.
+ \item Es w\xE4re aber \alert{syntaktisch richtig}, statt einem
+ Negationszeichen zwei Negationszeichen zu verwenden.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{block}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Zur Syntax von logischen Sprachen}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Die \alert{Syntax} einer logischen Sprache ist die
+ \alert{Menge von Regeln}, nach der Formeln gebildet werden
+ d\xFCrfen.
+ \item Die \alert{Bedeutung} oder der \alert{Sinn} der Formeln
+ ist dabei egal.
+ \item
+ Jede logische Sprache hat ihre eigene Syntax; die Syntax
+ verschiedener Sprachen \xE4hneln sich aber oft.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section{Was ist Semantik?}
+
+\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen]{Semantik nat\xFCrlicher Sprachen}
+
+\begin{frame}{Was bedeutet ein Satz?}
+
+ \begin{quotation}
+ Der H\xF6rsaal ist gro\xDF.
+ \end{quotation}
+
+ \bigskip
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Dieser Satz hat eine \alert{Bedeutung}.
+ \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt solche Bedeutungen fest.
+ \item Syntaktisch falschen S\xE4tzen wird im Allgemeinen keine
+ Bedeutung zugewiesen.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Ein Satz, zwei Bedeutungen.}
+ \begin{quotation}
+ Steter Tropfen h\xF6hlt den Stein.
+ \end{quotation}
+
+ \bigskip
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Ein Satz kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben}, welche durch
+ \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind.
+ \item In der \alert{wortw\xF6rtlichen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass
+ Steine ausgeh\xF6hlte werden, wenn man jahrelang Wasser auf
+ sie tropft.
+ \item In der \alert{\xFCbertragenen Semantik} sagt der Satz aus, dass
+ sich Beharrlichkeit auszahlt.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Die Semantik der Hieroglyphen}
+ \includegraphicscopyright[height=8cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg}
+ {Unknown Author, Public Domain, Low Resolution}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Semantik von Programmiersprachen}
+
+\begin{frame}[fragile]{Was bedeutet ein Programm?}
+\begin{verbatim}
+for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
+ a[i] = a[i];
+\end{verbatim}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Auch dieser Programmtext \xBBbedeutet etwas\xAB, wir \xBBmeinen etwas\xAB
+ mit diesem Text.
+ \item Die \alert{Semantik der Programmiersprache} legt fest,
+ was mit dem Programmtext gemeint ist.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}[fragile]{Ein Programm, zwei Bedeutungen.}
+\begin{verbatim}
+for (int i = 0; i < 100; i++)
+ a[i] = a[i];
+\end{verbatim}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Ein Programmtext kann \alert{mehrere Bedeutungen haben},
+ welche durch \alert{unterschiedliche Semantiken} gegeben sind.
+ \item In der \alert{operationalen Semantik} bedeutet der
+ Programmtext, dass die ersten einhundert Elemente eines Arrays
+ \verb!a! nacheinander ihren eigenen Wert zugewiesen bekommen.
+ \item In der \alert{denotationellen Semantik} bedeutet der
+ Programmtext, dass nichts passiert.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection[Semantik\protect\\ logischer Sprachen]{Semantik logischer Sprachen}
+
+
+
+
+\section{Grundlage der Syntax: Text}
+
+\begin{frame}{Eine mathematische Sicht auf Text.}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Viele (aber nicht alle!) syntaktische Systeme bauen auf
+ \alert{Text} auf.
+ \item Auch solche Systeme, die nicht auf Text aufbauen, lassen sich
+ trotzdem durch Text beschreiben.
+ \item Es ist deshalb n\xFCtzlich, auf Text \text{Methoden der
+ Mathematik} anwenden zu k\xF6nnen.
+ \item Im Folgenden wird deshalb die \alert{mathematische Sicht} auf
+ Text eingef\xFChrt, die \alert{in der gesamten Theoretischen
+ Informatik} genutzt wird.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Alphabete}
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Alphabete}
+ \begin{definition}[Alphabet]
+ Ein \alert{Alphabet} ist eine nicht-leere, endliche Menge von
+ \alert{Symbolen} (auch \alert{Buchstaben} genannt).
+ \end{definition}
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Alphabete werden h\xE4ufig mit griechischen Gro\xDFbuchstaben
+ bezeichnet, also $\Gamma$ oder~$\Sigma$. Manchmal auch mit
+ lateinischen Gro\xDFbuchstaben, also $N$ oder~$T$.
+ \item Ein Symbol oder \xBBBuchstabe\xAB kann auch ein komplexes oder
+ komisches \xBBDing\xAB sein wie ein Pointer oder ein Leerzeichen.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \begin{examples}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Die Gro\xDF- und Kleinbuchstaben
+ \item Die Menge $\{0,1\}$ (bei Informatikern beliebt)
+ \item Die Menge $\{A,C,G,T\}$ (bei Biologen beliebt)
+ \item Die Zeichenmenge des UNICODE.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{examples}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Worte}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Worte}
+ \begin{definition}[Wort]
+ Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine (endliche) Folge von Symbolen.
+ \end{definition}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \xBBWorte\xAB sind im Prinzip dasselbe wie
+ Strings. Insbesondere k\xF6nnen in Worten Leerzeichen als Symbole
+ auftauchen.
+ \item Die Menge aller Worte \xFCber einem Alphabet $\Sigma$ hat einen
+ besonderen Namen: $\Sigma^*$.
+ \item
+ Deshalb schreibt man oft: \xBBSei $w \in \Sigma^*$, \dots\xAB
+ \item Es gibt auch ein \alert{leeres Wort}, abgek\xFCrzt
+ $\epsilon$ oder $\lambda$, das dem String
+ \texttt{\char`\"\char`\"} entspricht.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \begin{examples}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item \texttt{Hallo}
+ \item \texttt{TATAAAATATTA}
+ \item $\epsilon$
+ \item \texttt{Hallo Welt.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{examples}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{5-Minuten-Aufgabe}
+ Die folgenden Aufgaben sind nach Schwierigkeit sortiert. L\xF6sen Sie
+ \alert{eine} der Aufgaben.
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item
+ Schreiben Sie alle Worte der L\xE4nge h\xF6chstens $2$ \xFCber dem Alphabet
+ $\Sigma = \{0,1,*\}$ auf.
+ \item
+ Wie viele Worte der L\xE4nge $n$ \xFCber dem Alphabet $\Sigma =
+ \{0,1,*\}$ gibt es?
+ \item
+ Wie viele Worte der L\xE4nge h\xF6chstens $n$ \xFCber einem Alphabet mit
+ $q$ Buchstaben gibt es?
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Sprachen}
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Definition}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Nat\xFCrlichen Sprachen sind komplexe Dinge, bestehend aus
+ W\xF6rtern, ihrer Ausprache, einer Grammatik, Ausnahmen, Dialekten,
+ und vielem mehr.
+ \item Bei \alert{formalen Sprachen} vereinfacht man radikal.
+ \item Formale Sprachen m\xFCssen weder sinnvoll noch interessant sein.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ \begin{definition}[Formale Sprache]
+ Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine (oft unendliche!) Menge von
+ Worten f\xFCr ein festes Alphabet.
+ \end{definition}
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Statt \frqq formale Sprache\flqq\ sagt man einfach \frqq Sprache\flqq.
+ \item Als Menge von Worten ist eine Sprache eine Teilmenge von
+ $\Sigma^*$.
+ \item
+ Deshalb schreibt man oft: \frqq Sei $L \subseteq \Sigma^*$,
+ \dots\flqq
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen}{Einfache Beispiele}
+ \begin{examples}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Die Menge $\{AAA, AAC, AAT\}$ (endliche Sprache).
+ \item Die Menge aller Java-Programmtexte (unendliche Sprache).
+ \item Die Menge aller Basensequenzen, die \texttt{TATA} enthalten
+ (unendliche Sprache).
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{examples}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Ein Renderer produziert 3D-Bilder.
+ \item Dazu erh\xE4lt er eine \alert{Szenerie} als Eingabe.
+ \item Diese Szenerie ist als \alert{Text}, also als ein \alert{Wort} gegeben.
+ \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle
+ \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Szenerien} enth\xE4lt.
+ \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Das
+ \xBBWort\xAB, das eine Szenerie beschreibt\dots}
+\only<presentation>{\scriptsize}
+\begin{verbatim*}
+global_settings { assumed_gamma 1.0 }
+
+camera {
+ location <10.0, 10, -10.0>
+ direction 1.5*z
+ right x*image_width/image_height
+ look_at <0.0, 0.0, 0.0>
+}
+
+sky_sphere { pigment { color rgb <0.6,0.7,1.0> } }
+
+light_source {
+ <0, 0, 0> // light's position (translated below)
+ color rgb <1, 1, 1> // light's color
+ translate <-30, 30, -30>
+ shadowless
+}
+
+#declare i = 0;
+#declare Steps = 30;
+#declare Kugel = sphere{<0,0,0>,0.5 pigment{color rgb<1,0,0>}};
+
+#while(i<Steps)
+ object{Kugel translate<3,0,0> rotate <0,i * 360 / Steps, 0> }
+ #declare i = i + 1;
+#end
+\end{verbatim*}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{\dots\ und was es bedeutet.}
+ \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg}
+ {Copyright Matthias Kabel, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Medieninformatik}{Komplexeres Beispielbild, das ein Renderer produziert.}
+ \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg}
+ {Copyright Giorgio Krenkel and Alex Sandri, GNU Free Documentation License, Low Resolution}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik}
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item In der Bioinformatik untersucht man unter anderem Proteine.
+ \item Dazu erh\xE4lt man \alert{Molek\xFClbeschreibungen} als Eingabe.
+ \item Eine solche ist auch ein \alert{Wort}.
+ \item Eine \alert{Syntax} beschreibt die (formale) Sprache, die alle
+ \alert{syntaktisch korrekten Molk\xFClbeschreibungen} enth\xE4lt.
+ \item Eine \alert{Semantik} beschreibt, was diese Beschreibungen bedeuten.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik}
+ {Das \xBBWort\xAB, das ein Protein beschreibt\dots}
+\only<presentation>{\tiny}
+\only<article>{\footnotesize}
+\begin{verbatim}
+HEADER HYDROLASE 25-JUL-03 1UJ1
+TITLE CRYSTAL STRUCTURE OF SARS CORONAVIRUS MAIN PROTEINASE
+TITLE 2 (3CLPRO)
+COMPND MOL_ID: 1;
+COMPND 2 MOLECULE: 3C-LIKE PROTEINASE;
+COMPND 3 CHAIN: A, B;
+COMPND 4 SYNONYM: MAIN PROTEINASE, 3CLPRO;
+COMPND 5 EC: 3.4.24.-;
+COMPND 6 ENGINEERED: YES
+SOURCE MOL_ID: 1;
+SOURCE 2 ORGANISM_SCIENTIFIC: SARS CORONAVIRUS;
+SOURCE 3 ORGANISM_COMMON: VIRUSES;
+SOURCE 4 STRAIN: SARS;
+...
+REVDAT 1 18-NOV-03 1UJ1 0
+JRNL AUTH H.YANG,M.YANG,Y.DING,Y.LIU,Z.LOU,Z.ZHOU,L.SUN,L.MO,
+JRNL AUTH 2 S.YE,H.PANG,G.F.GAO,K.ANAND,M.BARTLAM,R.HILGENFELD,
+JRNL AUTH 3 Z.RAO
+JRNL TITL THE CRYSTAL STRUCTURES OF SEVERE ACUTE RESPIRATORY
+JRNL TITL 2 SYNDROME VIRUS MAIN PROTEASE AND ITS COMPLEX WITH
+JRNL TITL 3 AN INHIBITOR
+JRNL REF PROC.NAT.ACAD.SCI.USA V. 100 13190 2003
+JRNL REFN ASTM PNASA6 US ISSN 0027-8424
+....
+ATOM 1 N PHE A 3 63.478 -27.806 23.971 1.00 44.82 N
+ATOM 2 CA PHE A 3 64.607 -26.997 24.516 1.00 42.13 C
+ATOM 3 C PHE A 3 64.674 -25.701 23.723 1.00 41.61 C
+ATOM 4 O PHE A 3 65.331 -25.633 22.673 1.00 40.73 O
+ATOM 5 CB PHE A 3 65.912 -27.763 24.358 1.00 44.33 C
+ATOM 6 CG PHE A 3 67.065 -27.162 25.108 1.00 44.20 C
+ATOM 7 CD1 PHE A 3 67.083 -27.172 26.496 1.00 43.35 C
+ATOM 8 CD2 PHE A 3 68.135 -26.595 24.422 1.00 43.49 C
+ATOM 9 CE1 PHE A 3 68.140 -26.631 27.187 1.00 43.21 C
+ATOM 10 CE2 PHE A 3 69.210 -26.046 25.108 1.00 42.91 C
+ATOM 11 CZ PHE A 3 69.216 -26.062 26.493 1.00 43.22 C
+ATOM 12 N ARG A 4 64.007 -24.666 24.228 1.00 34.90 N
+ATOM 13 CA ARG A 4 63.951 -23.376 23.543 1.00 37.71 C
+...
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}[fragile]{Formale Sprachen in der Bioinformatik}
+ {\dots\ und das Protein, das beschrieben wird.}
+
+ \includegraphicscopyright[width=9.5cm]{beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg}
+ {Copyright Till Tantau, Low Resultion}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\section<article>{Zusammenfassung}
+\section<presentation>*{Zusammenfassung}
+
+\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung}
+ \begin{enumerate}
+ \item Ein \alert{Wort} ist eine Folge von Symbolen aus einem
+ \alert{Alphabet}.
+ \item Eine \alert{Syntax} besteht aus Regeln, nach denen
+ Worte (Texte) gebaut werden d\xFCrfen.
+ \item Eine \alert{Semantik} legt fest, was Worte \alert{bedeuten}.
+ \item Eine \alert{formale Sprache} ist eine Menge von Worten
+ \xFCber einem Alphabet.
+ \end{enumerate}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
+
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-body.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/pdf
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
===================================================================
(Binary files differ)
Index: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:mime-type
## -0,0 +1 ##
+application/octet-stream
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified
+%
+% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
+% 2. under the GNU Public License.
+%
+% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
+
+\documentclass[german,a4paper,9pt]{extarticle}
+\usepackage{beamerarticle}
+\input{beamerexample-lecture-style.tex}
+\input{beamerexample-lecture-body.tex}
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+% Copyright 2007 by Till Tantau
+%
+% This file may be distributed and/or modified
+%
+% 1. under the LaTeX Project Public License and/or
+% 2. under the GNU Public License.
+%
+% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
+
+
+% Common packages
+
+\usepackage[german]{babel}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage{times}
+\mode<article>
+{
+ \usepackage{times}
+ \usepackage{mathptmx}
+ \usepackage[left=1.5cm,right=6cm,top=1.5cm,bottom=3cm]{geometry}
+}
+
+\usepackage{hyperref}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage{tikz}
+\usepackage{colortbl}
+\usepackage{yfonts}
+\usepackage{colortbl}
+\usepackage{translator} % comment this, if not available
+
+
+% Common settings for all lectures in this course
+
+\def\lecturename{Logik f\xFCr Informatiker}
+
+\title{\insertlecture}
+
+\author{Till Tantau}
+
+\institute
+{
+ Institut f\xFCr Theoretische Informatik\\
+ Universit\xE4t zu L\xFCbeck
+}
+
+\subject{Vorlesung \lecturename}
+
+
+
+
+% Beamer version theme settings
+
+\useoutertheme[height=0pt,width=2cm,right]{sidebar}
+\usecolortheme{rose,sidebartab}
+\useinnertheme{circles}
+\usefonttheme[only large]{structurebold}
+
+\setbeamercolor{sidebar right}{bg=black!15}
+\setbeamercolor{structure}{fg=blue}
+\setbeamercolor{author}{parent=structure}
+
+\setbeamerfont{title}{series=\normalfont,size=\LARGE}
+\setbeamerfont{title in sidebar}{series=\bfseries}
+\setbeamerfont{author in sidebar}{series=\bfseries}
+\setbeamerfont*{item}{series=}
+\setbeamerfont{frametitle}{size=}
+\setbeamerfont{block title}{size=\small}
+\setbeamerfont{subtitle}{size=\normalsize,series=\normalfont}
+
+\setbeamertemplate{navigation symbols}{}
+\setbeamertemplate{bibliography item}[book]
+\setbeamertemplate{sidebar right}
+{
+ {\usebeamerfont{title in sidebar}%
+ \vskip1.5em%
+ \hskip3pt%
+ \usebeamercolor[fg]{title in sidebar}%
+ \insertshorttitle[width=\dimexpr2cm-6pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par%
+ \vskip1.25em%
+ }%
+ {%
+ \hskip1pt%
+ \usebeamercolor[fg]{author in sidebar}%
+ \usebeamerfont{author in sidebar}%
+ \insertshortauthor[width=\dimexpr2cm-2pt\relax,center,respectlinebreaks]\par%
+ \vskip1.25em%
+ }%
+ \hbox to2cm{\hss\insertlogo\hss}
+ \vskip1.25em%
+ \insertverticalnavigation{2cm}%
+ \vfill
+ \hbox to 2cm{\hfill\usebeamerfont{subsection in
+ sidebar}\strut\usebeamercolor[fg]{subsection in
+ sidebar}\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber\hskip5pt}%
+ \vskip3pt%
+}%
+
+\setbeamertemplate{title page}
+{
+ \vbox{}
+ \vskip1em
+ {\huge Kapitel \insertshortlecture\par}
+ {\usebeamercolor[fg]{title}\usebeamerfont{title}\inserttitle\par}%
+ \ifx\insertsubtitle\@empty%
+ \else%
+ \vskip0.25em%
+ {\usebeamerfont{subtitle}\usebeamercolor[fg]{subtitle}\insertsubtitle\par}%
+ \fi%
+ \vskip1em\par
+ Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename}\ vom \insertdate\par
+ \vskip0pt plus1filll
+ \leftskip=0pt plus1fill\insertauthor\par
+ \insertinstitute\vskip1em
+}
+
+\logo{\includegraphics[width=2cm]{beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf}}
+
+
+
+% Article version layout settings
+
+\mode<article>
+
+\makeatletter
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+ \parsep 0pt
+ \topsep 5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus5\p@
+ \itemsep0pt}
+\let\@listi=\@listI
+
+
+\setbeamertemplate{frametitle}{\paragraph*{\insertframetitle\
+ \ \small\insertframesubtitle}\ \par
+}
+\setbeamertemplate{frame end}{%
+ \marginpar{\scriptsize\hbox to 1cm{\sffamily%
+ \hfill\strut\insertshortlecture.\insertframenumber}\hrule height .2pt}}
+\setlength{\marginparwidth}{1cm}
+\setlength{\marginparsep}{4.5cm}
+
+\def\@maketitle{\makechapter}
+
+\def\makechapter{
+ \newpage
+ \null
+ \vskip 2em%
+ {%
+ \parindent=0pt
+ \raggedright
+ \sffamily
+ \vskip8pt
+ {\fontsize{36pt}{36pt}\selectfont Kapitel \insertshortlecture \par\vskip2pt}
+ {\fontsize{24pt}{28pt}\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertlecture\par\vskip4pt}
+ {\Large\selectfont \color{blue!50!black} \insertsubtitle\par}
+ \vskip10pt
+
+ \normalsize\selectfont Druckfassung der
+ Vorlesung \emph{\lecturename} vom \@date\par\vskip1.5em
+ \hfill Till Tantau, Institut f\xFCr Theoretische Informatik, Universit\xE4t zu L\xFCbeck
+ }
+ \par
+ \vskip 1.5em%
+}
+
+\let\origstartsection=\@startsection
+\def\@startsection#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+ \origstartsection{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6\normalfont\sffamily\color{blue!50!black}\selectfont}}
+
+\makeatother
+
+\mode
+<all>
+
+
+
+
+% Typesetting Listings
+
+\usepackage{listings}
+\lstset{language=Java}
+
+\alt<presentation>
+{\lstset{%
+ basicstyle=\footnotesize\ttfamily,
+ commentstyle=\slshape\color{green!50!black},
+ keywordstyle=\bfseries\color{blue!50!black},
+ identifierstyle=\color{blue},
+ stringstyle=\color{orange},
+ escapechar=\#,
+ emphstyle=\color{red}}
+}
+{
+ \lstset{%
+ basicstyle=\ttfamily,
+ keywordstyle=\bfseries,
+ commentstyle=\itshape,
+ escapechar=\#,
+ emphstyle=\bfseries\color{red}
+ }
+}
+
+
+
+% Common theorem-like environments
+
+\theoremstyle{definition}
+\newtheorem{exercise}[theorem]{\translate{Exercise}}
+
+
+
+
+% New useful definitions:
+
+\newbox\mytempbox
+\newdimen\mytempdimen
+
+\newcommand\includegraphicscopyright[3][]{%
+ \leavevmode\vbox{\vskip3pt\raggedright\setbox\mytempbox=\hbox{\includegraphics[#1]{#2}}%
+ \mytempdimen=\wd\mytempbox\box\mytempbox\par\vskip1pt%
+ \fontsize{3}{3.5}\selectfont{\color{black!25}{\vbox{\hsize=\mytempdimen#3}}}\vskip3pt%
+}}
+
+\newenvironment{colortabular}[1]{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{blue!20}{blue!10}\tabular{#1}\rowcolor{blue!40}}{\endtabular\medskip}
+
+\def\equad{\leavevmode\hbox{}\quad}
+
+\newenvironment{greencolortabular}[1]
+{\medskip\rowcolors[]{1}{green!50!black!20}{green!50!black!10}%
+ \tabular{#1}\rowcolor{green!50!black!40}}%
+{\endtabular\medskip}
+
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/examples/a-lecture/beamerexample-lecture-style.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/fdl.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,451 +0,0 @@
-
- GNU Free Documentation License
- Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
-
-
- Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
- <https://fsf.org/>
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
-0. PREAMBLE
-
-The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
-functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
-assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
-with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
-Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
-to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
-for modifications made by others.
-
-This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
-works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
-complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
-license designed for free software.
-
-We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
-software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
-program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
-software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
-it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
-whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
-principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
-
-
-1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
-
-This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
-contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
-distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
-world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
-work under the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below,
-refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
-licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you
-copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
-under copyright law.
-
-A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
-Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
-modifications and/or translated into another language.
-
-A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
-the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
-publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
-subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall
-directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in
-part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain
-any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
-connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
-commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
-them.
-
-The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
-are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
-that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
-section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
-allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
-Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
-Sections then there are none.
-
-The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed,
-as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
-the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
-be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
-
-A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
-represented in a format whose specification is available to the
-general public, that is suitable for revising the document
-straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
-pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
-drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
-for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
-to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
-format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
-or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
-An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
-of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
-
-Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
-ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
-or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
-HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
-transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
-include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
-proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
-processing tools are not generally available, and the
-machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
-processors for output purposes only.
-
-The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
-plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
-this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
-formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
-the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
-preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
-
-The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies of
-the Document to the public.
-
-A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose
-title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
-text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
-specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements",
-"Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title"
-of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
-section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition.
-
-The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
-states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
-Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
-License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
-implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
-no effect on the meaning of this License.
-
-2. VERBATIM COPYING
-
-You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
-commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
-copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
-to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no
-other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
-technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
-copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
-compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
-number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
-
-You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
-you may publicly display copies.
-
-
-3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
-
-If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
-printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
-Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
-copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
-Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
-the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
-you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
-the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
-visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
-Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
-the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
-as verbatim copying in other respects.
-
-If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
-legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
-reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
-pages.
-
-If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
-more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
-copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
-a computer-network location from which the general network-using
-public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
-a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
-If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
-when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
-that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
-location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
-Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
-edition to the public.
-
-It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
-Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to
-give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
-Document.
-
-
-4. MODIFICATIONS
-
-You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
-the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
-the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
-Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
-and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
-of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
-
-A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
- from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
- (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
- of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
- if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
-B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
- responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
- Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
- Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
- unless they release you from this requirement.
-C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
- Modified Version, as the publisher.
-D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
-E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
- adjacent to the other copyright notices.
-F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
- giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
- terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
-G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
- and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
-H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
-I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add
- to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
- publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
- there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one
- stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
- given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
- Version as stated in the previous sentence.
-J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
- public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
- the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
- it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
- You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
- least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
- publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
-K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
- Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
- the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
- and/or dedications given therein.
-L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
- unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
- or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
-M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
- may not be included in the Modified Version.
-N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements"
- or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
-O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
-
-If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
-appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
-copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
-of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
-list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
-These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
-
-You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
-nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
-parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
-been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
-standard.
-
-You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
-passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
-of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
-Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
-through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
-includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
-by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
-you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
-permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
-
-The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
-give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
-imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
-
-
-5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
-
-You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
-License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
-versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
-Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
-list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
-license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
-
-The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
-multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
-copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
-different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
-adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
-author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
-Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
-Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
-
-In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History"
-in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
-"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements",
-and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
-Entitled "Endorsements".
-
-
-6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
-
-You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
-documents released under this License, and replace the individual
-copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
-that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules
-of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all
-other respects.
-
-You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
-distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a
-copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
-License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
-document.
-
-
-7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
-
-A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
-and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
-distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright
-resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
-of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
-When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
-apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
-derivative works of the Document.
-
-If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
-copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
-the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
-covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
-electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
-Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
-aggregate.
-
-
-8. TRANSLATION
-
-Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
-distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
-Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
-permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
-translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
-original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
-translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
-Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
-the original English version of this License and the original versions
-of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
-the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
-or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
-
-If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
-"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
-its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
-title.
-
-
-9. TERMINATION
-
-You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
-except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
-otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and
-will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
-
-However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license
-from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally,
-unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally
-terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder
-fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to
-60 days after the cessation.
-
-Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
-reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
-violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
-received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
-copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
-your receipt of the notice.
-
-Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
-licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
-this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
-reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does
-not give you any rights to use it.
-
-
-10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
-
-The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the
-GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions
-will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
-detail to address new problems or concerns. See
-https://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
-
-Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
-If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
-License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
-following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
-of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
-Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
-number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
-as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document
-specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this
-License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a
-version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the
-Document.
-
-11. RELICENSING
-
-"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
-World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
-provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
-public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A
-"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the site
-means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
-
-"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
-license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
-corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
-California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
-published by that same organization.
-
-"Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in
-part, as part of another Document.
-
-An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
-License, and if all works that were first published under this License
-somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or
-in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and
-(2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
-
-The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site
-under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009,
-provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
-
-
-ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
-
-To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
-the License in the document and put the following copyright and
-license notices just after the title page:
-
- Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME.
- Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
- under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
- or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
- with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
- A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
- Free Documentation License".
-
-If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
-replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
-
- with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
- Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
-
-If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
-combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
-situation.
-
-If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
-recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
-free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
-to permit their use in free software.
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% Diese Datei enth\xE4lt eine L\xF6sungsvorlage f\xFCr:
-
-
-% - Vortr\xE4ge \xFCber ein beliebiges Thema.
-% - Vortragsl\xE4nge zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten.
-% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschn\xF6rkelt/dekorativ.
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
-% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
-% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
-% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
-% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
-% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
-% notice.
-
-
-
-\mode<presentation>
-{
- \usetheme{Warsaw}
- % oder ...
-
- \setbeamercovered{transparent}
- % oder auch nicht
-}
-
-
-\usepackage[german]{babel}
-% oder was auch immer
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% oder was auch immer
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen
-% m\xFCssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile
-% mit fontenc zu l\xF6schen.
-
-
-\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln n\xF6tig)
-{Titel}
-
-\subtitle
-{Untertitel} % (optional)
-
-\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren)
-{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}}
-% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
-% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
-
-\institute[Universit\xE4ten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft n\xF6tig)
-{
- \inst{1}%
- Institut f\xFCr Informatik\\
- Universit\xE4t Hier
- \and
- \inst{2}%
- Institut f\xFCr theoretische Philosophie\\
- Universit\xE4t Dort}
-% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
-% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
-% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich f\xFCr die genau Adresse.
-
-\date[Kurzversion des Anlass] % (optional)
-{Datum / Anlass}
-
-
-\subject{Informatik}
-% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einf\xFCgt. Kann gut
-% weggelassen werden.
-
-
-% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden
-% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat
-% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einf\xFCgen:
-
-% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
-% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
-
-
-
-% Folgendes sollte gel\xF6scht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes
-% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen m\xF6chte.
-\AtBeginSubsection[]
-{
- \begin{frame}<beamer>{Gliederung}
- \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
- \end{frame}
-}
-
-
-% Falls Aufz\xE4hlungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann
-% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden:
-
-%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \titlepage
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Gliederung}
- \tableofcontents
- % Die Option [pausesections] k\xF6nnte n\xFCtzlich sein.
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-% Da dies ein Vorlage f\xFCr beliebige Vortr\xE4ge ist, lassen sich kaum
-% allgemeine Regeln zur Strukturierung angeben. Da die Vorlage f\xFCr
-% einen Vortrag zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten gedacht ist, f\xE4hrt man aber
-% mit folgenden Regeln oft gut.
-
-% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der
-% Zusammenfassung).
-% - *H\xF6chstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt.
-% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also
-% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben.
-
-
-
-\section{Einleitung}
-
-\subsection[Kurzversion des ersten Unterabschnittstitels]
-{Erster Unterabschnittstitel}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.\\
- Korrekte Gro\xDF-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.}
- % - Eine \xDCberschrift fasst einen Rahmen verst\xE4ndlich zusammen. Man
- % muss sie verstehen k\xF6nnen, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des
- % Rahmens versteht.
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen.
- \item
- Sehr kurze S\xE4tze oder Satzglieder verwenden.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-
- Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots
- \begin{itemize}
- \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Erster Punkt.
- \pause
- \item
- Zweiter Punkt.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item<3->
- Erster Punkt.
- \item<4->
- Zweiter Punkt.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl:
- \begin{itemize}
- \uncover<5->{\item
- Erster Punkt.}
- \uncover<6->{\item
- Zweiter Punkt.}
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Zweiter Unterabschnittstitel}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\section*{Zusammenfassung}
-
-\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung}
-
- % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein.
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
- \item
- Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
- \item
- Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr.
- \end{itemize}
-
- % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional.
- \vskip0pt plus.5fill
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Ausblick
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Etwas, was wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
- \item
- Nochwas, das wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,216 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% This file is a solution template for:
-
-% - Giving a talk on some subject.
-% - The talk is between 15min and 45min long.
-% - Style is ornate.
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
-% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
-% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
-% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
-% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
-% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
-% notice.
-
-
-\mode<presentation>
-{
- \usetheme{Warsaw}
- % or ...
-
- \setbeamercovered{transparent}
- % or whatever (possibly just delete it)
-}
-
-
-\usepackage[english]{babel}
-% or whatever
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% or whatever
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1
-% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc.
-
-
-\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles)
-{Presentation Title}
-
-\subtitle
-{Presentation Subtitle} % (optional)
-
-\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors)
-{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}}
-% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different
-% affiliation.
-
-\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed)
-{
- \inst{1}%
- Department of Computer Science\\
- University of Somewhere
- \and
- \inst{2}%
- Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\
- University of Elsewhere}
-% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations.
-% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address.
-
-\date[Short Occasion] % (optional)
-{Date / Occasion}
-
-\subject{Talks}
-% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left
-% out.
-
-
-
-% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx
-% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex,
-% resp., then you can add a logo as follows:
-
-% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
-% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
-
-
-
-% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at
-% the beginning of each subsection:
-\AtBeginSubsection[]
-{
- \begin{frame}<beamer>{Outline}
- \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
- \end{frame}
-}
-
-
-% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment
-% the following command:
-
-%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \titlepage
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Outline}
- \tableofcontents
- % You might wish to add the option [pausesections]
-\end{frame}
-
-
-% Since this a solution template for a generic talk, very little can
-% be said about how it should be structured. However, the talk length
-% of between 15min and 45min and the theme suggest that you stick to
-% the following rules:
-
-% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary).
-% - At *most* three subsections per section.
-% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about
-% 15 and 30 frames, all told.
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-\subsection[Short First Subsection Name]{First Subsection Name}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.}
- % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion
- % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself.
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Use \texttt{itemize} a lot.
- \item
- Use very short sentences or short phrases.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-
- You can create overlays\dots
- \begin{itemize}
- \item using the \texttt{pause} command:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- First item.
- \pause
- \item
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- using overlay specifications:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item<3->
- First item.
- \item<4->
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- using the general \texttt{uncover} command:
- \begin{itemize}
- \uncover<5->{\item
- First item.}
- \uncover<6->{\item
- Second item.}
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Second Subsection}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section*{Summary}
-
-\begin{frame}{Summary}
-
- % Keep the summary *very short*.
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
- \item
- The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
- \item
- Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that.
- \end{itemize}
-
- % The following outlook is optional.
- \vskip0pt plus.5fill
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Outlook
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Something you haven't solved.
- \item
- Something else you haven't solved.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
-% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour :
-
-% - donner un expos\xE9 sur un certain sujet
-% - une dur\xE9e variant de 15 \xE0 45 minutes
-% - un style ornemental.
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa <philippejjg at free.fr>
-%
-% En principe, ce fichier peut \xEAtre redistribu\xE9 et/ou modifi\xE9 conform\xE9ment
-% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% Cependant, ce fichier est suppos\xE9 comme \xE9tant un "exemple-type" qui
-% peut \xEAtre modifi\xE9 selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si
-% vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' "exemple-type" et non
-% sp\xE9cifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un package ou
-% programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier
-% librement et de modifier ce fichier et m\xEAme d'effacer ce message de
-% copyright.
-
-
-
-\mode<presentation> {
- \usetheme{Warsaw}
- % ou autre ...
-
- \setbeamercovered{transparent}
- % ou autre chose (il est \xE9galement possible de supprimer cette ligne)
-}
-
-
-\usepackage[french]{babel}
-% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel}
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% or autre
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent \xEAtre assortis. Si T1
-% ne para\xEEt pas tr\xE8s esth\xE9tique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc.
-
-
-\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long)
-{Tr\xE8s long titre qui prend de la place}
-
-\subtitle {Sous-titre de la pr\xE9sentation}
-
-\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs)
-{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}}
-% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils appara\xEEtrons dans l'article
-% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations
-% diff\xE9rentes.
-
-\institute[Universit\xE9s de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais g\xE9n\xE9ralement n\xE9cessaire)
-{
- \inst{1}%
- D\xE9partement d'Informatique\\
- Universit\xE9 de Quelque Part
- \and
- \inst{2}%
- D\xE9partement de Philosophie Th\xE9orique\\
- Universit\xE9 d'Ailleurs}
-% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations
-% - Fa\xEEtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'int\xE9resse \xE0 votre adresse.
-
-\date[Version courte] % (facultatif)
-{Date / Occasion}
-
-\subject{Expos\xE9}
-% Ins\xE9r\xE9 uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut \xEAtre
-% supprim\xE9.
-
-
-
-% Si vous avez un fichier nomm\xE9 "universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier.xxx", o\xF9 xxx
-% est un format graphique accept\xE9 par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png),
-% alors vous pouvez ins\xE9rer votre logo ainsi :
-
-% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier}
-% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}}
-
-
-
-% \xC0 supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des mati\xE8res apparaisse
-% au d\xE9but de chaque sous-section :
-
-\AtBeginSubsection[] {
- \begin{frame}<beamer>{Lignes directrices}
- \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
- \end{frame}
-}
-
-
-% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un \xE0 un,
-% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel
-% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) :
-
-%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}
- \titlepage
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices}
- \tableofcontents
- % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections]
-\end{frame}
-
-
-% Puisqu'il s'agit d'un exemple-type pour un expos\xE9 d'ordre g\xE9n\xE9ral, peu de choses
-% peuvent \xEAtre dites concernant sa structure. Cependant, la dur\xE9e varie de 15 minutes
-% \xE0 45 minutes et le th\xE8me vous sugg\xE8re de suivre les r\xE8gles suivantes :
-
-% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des mati\xE8res).
-% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section
-% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il
-% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant \xE9t\xE9 comment\xE9s.
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-\subsection[Court titre s-section]{Un tr\xE8s long titre de sous-section.}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.}
- % - Le titre doit r\xE9sumer le transparent dans un langage compr\xE9hensible
- % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent.
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} \xE0 volont\xE9.
- \item Utilisez des phrases tr\xE8s courtes et de courtes expressions.
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent}
-
- Vous pouvez cr\xE9er des recouvrements\dots
- \begin{itemize}
- \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} :
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Premier item.
- \pause
- \item
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- en utilisant les sp\xE9cifications des recouvrements
- \begin{itemize}
- \item<3->
- Premier item.
- \item<4->
- Second item.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- en utilisant en g\xE9n\xE9ral la commande \texttt{uncover} :
- \begin{itemize}
- \uncover<5->{\item
- Premier item.}
- \uncover<6->{\item
- Second item.}
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\subsection{Deuxi\xE8me sous-section}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super !
-\end{frame}
-
-\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
-
- {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment g\xE9nial !
-\end{frame}
-
-
-
-\section*{R\xE9sum\xE9}
-
-\begin{frame}{R\xE9sum\xE9}
-
- % Fa\xEEtes un r\xE9sum\xE9 *tr\xE8s court*.
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
- deux.
- \item
- Le \alert{deuxi\xE8me message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
- deux.
- \item
- Peut-\xEAtre un \alert{troisi\xE8me message}, mais pas plus que \xE7a.
- \end{itemize}
-
- % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives.
- \vskip0pt plus.5fill
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Perspectives
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
- \item
- Autre probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-
-\end{document}
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/gpl-2.0.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,339 +0,0 @@
- GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
- Version 2, June 1991
-
- Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
- 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
- Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
- of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
-
- Preamble
-
- The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
-freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
-License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
-software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
-General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
-Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
-using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
-the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
-your programs, too.
-
- When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
-price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
-have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
-this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
-if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
-in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
-
- To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
-anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
-These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
-distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
-
- For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
-gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
-you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
-source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
-rights.
-
- We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
-(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
-distribute and/or modify the software.
-
- Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
-that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
-software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
-want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
-that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
-authors' reputations.
-
- Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
-patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
-program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
-program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
-patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
-
- The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
-modification follow.
-
- GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
- TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-
- 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
-a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
-under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
-refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
-means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
-that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
-either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
-language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
-the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
-
-Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
-covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
-running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
-is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
-Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
-Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
-
- 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
-source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
-conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
-copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
-notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
-and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
-along with the Program.
-
-You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
-you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
-
- 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
-of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
-distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
-above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
-
- a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
- stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
-
- b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
- whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
- part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
- parties under the terms of this License.
-
- c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
- when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
- interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
- announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
- notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
- a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
- these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
- License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
- does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
- the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
-
-These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
-identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
-and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
-themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
-sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
-distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
-on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
-this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
-entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
-
-Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
-your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
-exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
-collective works based on the Program.
-
-In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
-with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
-a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
-the scope of this License.
-
- 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
-under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
-Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
-
- a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
- source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
- 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
- b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
- years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
- cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
- machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
- distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
- customarily used for software interchange; or,
-
- c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
- to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
- allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
- received the program in object code or executable form with such
- an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
-
-The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
-making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
-code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
-associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
-control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
-special exception, the source code distributed need not include
-anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
-form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
-operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
-itself accompanies the executable.
-
-If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
-access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
-access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
-distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
-compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
-
- 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
-except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
-otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
-void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
-However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
-this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
-parties remain in full compliance.
-
- 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
-signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
-distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
-prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
-modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
-Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
-all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
-the Program or works based on it.
-
- 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
-Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
-original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
-these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
-restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
-You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
-this License.
-
- 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
-infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
-conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
-otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
-excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
-distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
-License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
-may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
-license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
-all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
-the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
-refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
-
-If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
-any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
-apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
-circumstances.
-
-It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
-patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
-such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
-integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
-implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
-generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
-through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
-system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
-to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
-impose that choice.
-
-This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
-be a consequence of the rest of this License.
-
- 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
-certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
-original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
-may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
-those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
-countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
-the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
-
- 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
-of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
-be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
-address new problems or concerns.
-
-Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
-specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
-later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
-either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
-Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
-this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
-Foundation.
-
- 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
-programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
-to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
-Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
-make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
-of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
-of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
-
- NO WARRANTY
-
- 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
-FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
-OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
-PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
-OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
-MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
-TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
-PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
-REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
-
- 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
-WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
-REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
-INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
-OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
-TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
-YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
-PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
-POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
-
- END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
-
- How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
-
- If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
-possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
-free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
-
- To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
-to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
-convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
-the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
-
- <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
- Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
-
- This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- (at your option) any later version.
-
- This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
- but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
- GNU General Public License for more details.
-
- You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
- with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
- 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
-
-Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
-
-If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
-when it starts in an interactive mode:
-
- Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
- Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
- This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
- under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
-
-The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
-parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
-be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
-mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
-
-You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
-school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
-necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
-
- Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
- `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
-
- <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
- Ty Coon, President of Vice
-
-This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
-proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
-consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
-library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
-Public License instead of this License.
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,451 @@
+
+ GNU Free Documentation License
+ Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
+
+
+ Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+ <https://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+0. PREAMBLE
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+
+1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein. The "Document", below,
+refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section of
+the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall
+directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in
+part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain
+any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License. If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text. A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML
+or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple
+HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of
+transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats
+include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by
+proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or
+processing tools are not generally available, and the
+machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
+processors for output purposes only.
+
+The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title Page" means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies of
+the Document to the public.
+
+A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".) To "Preserve the Title"
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section "Entitled XYZ" according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+2. VERBATIM COPYING
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no
+other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+
+3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to
+give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
+Document.
+
+
+4. MODIFICATIONS
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+ from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+ (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+ of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version
+ if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+ responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+ Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+ Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+ unless they release you from this requirement.
+C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+ Modified Version, as the publisher.
+D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+ adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+ giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+ terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+ and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title, and add
+ to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+ publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If
+ there is no section Entitled "History" in the Document, create one
+ stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+ given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+ Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+ public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+ the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+ it was based on. These may be placed in the "History" section.
+ You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+ least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+ publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
+ Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all
+ the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
+ and/or dedications given therein.
+L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+ unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers
+ or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
+ may not be included in the Modified Version.
+N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled "Endorsements"
+ or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+
+5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled "History"
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+"History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You must delete all sections
+Entitled "Endorsements".
+
+
+6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
+documents released under this License, and replace the individual
+copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
+that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules
+of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all
+other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
+distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a
+copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
+License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
+document.
+
+
+7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
+the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+
+8. TRANSLATION
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
+"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
+its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
+title.
+
+
+9. TERMINATION
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and
+will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+
+However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license
+from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally,
+unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally
+terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder
+fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to
+60 days after the cessation.
+
+Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does
+not give you any rights to use it.
+
+
+10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the
+GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions
+will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in
+detail to address new problems or concerns. See
+https://www.gnu.org/licenses/.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document
+specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this
+License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a
+version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the
+Document.
+
+11. RELICENSING
+
+"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
+World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
+provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
+public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A
+"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the site
+means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
+
+"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
+license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
+corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
+California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
+published by that same organization.
+
+"Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or in
+part, as part of another Document.
+
+An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
+License, and if all works that were first published under this License
+somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or
+in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and
+(2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
+
+The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site
+under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009,
+provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
+
+
+ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+ Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME.
+ Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+ under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
+ or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+ with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.
+ A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
+ Free Documentation License".
+
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
+
+ with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
+ Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
+
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/fdl.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,339 @@
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ Version 2, June 1991
+
+ Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+ Preamble
+
+ The licenses for most software are designed to take away your
+freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public
+License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free
+software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This
+General Public License applies to most of the Free Software
+Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to
+using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by
+the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+ When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it
+if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it
+in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
+
+ To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid
+anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights.
+These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
+distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
+
+ For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that
+you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
+source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their
+rights.
+
+ We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and
+(2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy,
+distribute and/or modify the software.
+
+ Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain
+that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free
+software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we
+want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
+that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
+authors' reputations.
+
+ Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
+patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free
+program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the
+program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
+patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
+
+ The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+ TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+
+ 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains
+a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed
+under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below,
+refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
+means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law:
+that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it,
+either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another
+language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in
+the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
+
+Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not
+covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of
+running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program
+is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the
+Program (independent of having been made by running the Program).
+Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
+
+ 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's
+source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you
+conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
+copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the
+notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty;
+and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
+along with the Program.
+
+You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and
+you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
+
+ 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion
+of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and
+distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1
+above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+ a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices
+ stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
+
+ b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in
+ whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any
+ part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third
+ parties under the terms of this License.
+
+ c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively
+ when run, you must cause it, when started running for such
+ interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an
+ announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a
+ notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide
+ a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
+ these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this
+ License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but
+ does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on
+ the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
+
+These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
+identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program,
+and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in
+themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those
+sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
+distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based
+on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of
+this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the
+entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
+
+Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest
+your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to
+exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or
+collective works based on the Program.
+
+In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program
+with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of
+a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under
+the scope of this License.
+
+ 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it,
+under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of
+Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
+
+ a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable
+ source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
+ 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three
+ years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your
+ cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete
+ machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be
+ distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
+ customarily used for software interchange; or,
+
+ c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer
+ to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is
+ allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you
+ received the program in object code or executable form with such
+ an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
+
+The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for
+making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source
+code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any
+associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to
+control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
+special exception, the source code distributed need not include
+anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
+form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the
+operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component
+itself accompanies the executable.
+
+If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering
+access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent
+access to copy the source code from the same place counts as
+distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
+compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
+
+ 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program
+except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is
+void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under
+this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such
+parties remain in full compliance.
+
+ 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not
+signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or
+distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are
+prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
+modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
+all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
+the Program or works based on it.
+
+ 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the
+Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the
+original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to
+these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further
+restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein.
+You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to
+this License.
+
+ 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent
+infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues),
+conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot
+distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you
+may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent
+license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by
+all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then
+the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to
+refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
+
+If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under
+any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to
+apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
+circumstances.
+
+It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
+patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any
+such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the
+integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
+implemented by public license practices. Many people have made
+generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed
+through that system in reliance on consistent application of that
+system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing
+to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
+impose that choice.
+
+This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to
+be a consequence of the rest of this License.
+
+ 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in
+certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the
+original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
+may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding
+those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among
+countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates
+the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
+
+ 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
+specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any
+later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions
+either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
+Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of
+this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
+Foundation.
+
+ 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free
+programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author
+to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free
+Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes
+make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals
+of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and
+of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
+
+ NO WARRANTY
+
+ 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
+FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN
+OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
+PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED
+OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
+TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
+PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
+REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+ 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR
+REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
+INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING
+OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
+TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
+YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER
+PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
+POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+ END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+ How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+ If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+ To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+ <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+ Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ (at your option) any later version.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+ but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+ GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+ with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+ 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this
+when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+ Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
+ Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+ This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+ under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may
+be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be
+mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
+
+You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your
+school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if
+necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
+
+ Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
+ `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
+
+ <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
+ Ty Coon, President of Vice
+
+This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
+proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may
+consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the
+library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,416 @@
+The LaTeX Project Public License
+=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
+
+LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04
+
+Copyright 1999 2002-2008 LaTeX3 Project
+ Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this
+ license document, but modification of it is not allowed.
+
+
+PREAMBLE
+========
+
+The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under
+which the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed.
+
+You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright
+and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly
+suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but
+it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is
+unrelated to TeX.
+
+The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE',
+below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors
+who are considering distributing their works under this license.
+
+This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed
+and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of
+that work may be distributed.
+
+We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you
+the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work
+that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while
+maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of
+that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while
+meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex'
+and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions.
+
+
+DEFINITIONS
+===========
+
+In this license document the following terms are used:
+
+ `Work'
+ Any work being distributed under this License.
+
+ `Derived Work'
+ Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work.
+
+ `Modification'
+ Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable
+ law -- for example, the production of a file containing an
+ original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of
+ such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
+ translated into another language.
+
+ `Modify'
+ To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any
+ applicable law.
+
+ `Distribution'
+ Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in
+ whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to)
+ making any electronic components of the Work accessible by
+ file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file
+ systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS).
+
+ `Compiled Work'
+ A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it
+ is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may
+ include using installation facilities provided by the Work,
+ transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or
+ other activities. Note that modification of any installation
+ facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work.
+
+ `Current Maintainer'
+ A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is
+ no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under
+ any applicable law.
+
+ `Base Interpreter'
+ A program or process that is normally needed for running or
+ interpreting a part or the whole of the Work.
+
+ A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these
+ are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each
+ external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used
+ interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the
+ license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a
+ `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the
+ `LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `TeX language'.
+
+
+
+CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
+===========================================
+
+1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work
+are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In
+particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no
+requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work.
+
+2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you
+received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered
+modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived
+Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause.
+
+3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a
+complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2
+above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that
+the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly
+as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work
+directly from the Work.
+
+4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without
+restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may
+also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including
+Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works
+distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to
+be updated versions of the Work.
+
+5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify
+your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work,
+and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on
+the Derived Work.
+
+6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
+distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met
+for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states
+in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only
+the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption
+to a component of the Work.
+
+ a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement
+ for a component of the Work when that component is used with the
+ Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work
+ identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that
+ Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work
+ clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version
+ of this component to the user when used interactively with that
+ Base Interpreter.
+
+ b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices
+ detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a
+ prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part
+ of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log
+ of the changes.
+
+ c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons,
+ including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version
+ of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to)
+ the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the
+ Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that
+ they do provide such support for the Derived Work.
+
+ d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work:
+
+ 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work;
+ if your distribution of a modified component is made by
+ offering access to copy the modified component from a
+ designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
+ the Work from the same or some similar place meets this
+ condition, even though third parties are not compelled to
+ copy the Work along with the modified component;
+
+ 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete,
+ unmodified copy of the Work.
+
+7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
+distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as
+the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled
+Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with
+regard to the Derived Work.
+
+8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not
+apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it
+becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as
+it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above.
+
+9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative
+format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is
+then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or
+nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of
+applying that process.
+
+10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license
+ provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in
+ Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have
+ to honor the rest of the conditions in this license.
+
+ b. If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, that
+ Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of
+ itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the
+ restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work.
+
+11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to
+the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating
+such works with the Work by any means.
+
+12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent
+complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws.
+
+
+NO WARRANTY
+===========
+
+There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in
+writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without
+warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not
+limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
+particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance
+of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you assume
+the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.
+
+In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing
+will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the components of the
+Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or modify the Work as
+permitted above, be liable to you for damages, including any general,
+special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of any use of
+the Work or out of inability to use the Work (including, but not limited
+to, loss of data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by
+anyone as a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other
+programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other
+party has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
+
+
+MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK
+=======================
+
+The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder
+explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in
+the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder
+or simply that it is `author-maintained'.
+
+The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer
+who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error
+reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail
+address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge
+or act upon these error reports.
+
+The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there
+is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current
+Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means
+of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other
+significant signs of active maintenance.
+
+You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with
+any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role.
+
+If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of
+the Work through the following steps:
+
+ 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and
+ the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of
+ an Internet or similar search.
+
+ 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work
+ is still maintained.
+
+ a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer
+ to update their communication data within one month.
+
+ b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active
+ maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce
+ within the pertinent community your intention to take over
+ maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be
+ done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.)
+
+ 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass
+ maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect
+ immediately upon announcement.
+
+ b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright
+ Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you,
+ then this takes effect immediately upon announcement.
+
+ 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above
+ and after three months your intention is challenged neither by
+ the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other
+ people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as
+ to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer.
+
+ 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes
+ reachable once more within three months of a change completed
+ under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must
+ become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided
+ they then update their communication data within one month.
+
+A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact
+that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license.
+
+If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should
+immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous
+statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also
+announce your new status to the same pertinent community as
+in 2b) above.
+
+
+WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE
+======================================================
+
+This section contains important instructions, examples, and
+recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their
+works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in
+this section.
+
+Choosing This License or Another License
+----------------------------------------
+
+If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution*
+conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then
+do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead,
+distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text
+of this license as a model for your own license, but your license
+should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that
+your work is distributed under the LPPL.
+
+The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains
+the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains,
+for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public
+License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is
+unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be
+relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any
+license are encouraged to read it.
+
+A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution
+-----------------------------------------------------
+
+It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own
+personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for
+distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such
+modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by
+accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or
+it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified
+version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions
+of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse,
+cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your
+best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public
+one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work
+without altering any of its licensed components.
+
+How to Use This License
+-----------------------
+
+To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both
+an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work
+was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a
+statement that the distribution and/or modification of that
+component is constrained by the conditions in this license.
+
+Here is an example of such a notice and statement:
+
+ %% pig.dtx
+ %% Copyright 2005 M. Y. Name
+ %
+ % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
+ % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+ % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+ % The latest version of this license is in
+ % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+ % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+ % version 2005/12/01 or later.
+ %
+ % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
+ %
+ % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name.
+ %
+ % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins
+ % and the derived file pig.sty.
+
+Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions
+given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring
+to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being
+generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter'
+referring to any `LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright Holder' and
+`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'.
+
+If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your
+Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'.
+However, we recommend that you use `maintained', as the Maintenance
+section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to
+the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it
+yourself.
+
+Derived Works That Are Not Replacements
+---------------------------------------
+
+Several clauses of the LPPL specify means to provide reliability and
+stability for the user community. They therefore concern themselves
+with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used as a
+(compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original Work. If
+this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are reused for a
+completely different task), then clauses 6b and 6d shall not apply.
+
+
+Important Recommendations
+-------------------------
+
+ Defining What Constitutes the Work
+
+ The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the
+ files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a
+ way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work.
+ This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the
+ files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by
+ using a line such as:
+
+ % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
+
+ in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be
+ impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you
+ to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be
+ entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise
+ the Work.
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/lppl-1-3c.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+base:
+art/
+beamer.cls
+beamerarticle.sty
+beamerbasearticle.sty
+beamerbaseauxtemplates.sty
+beamerbaseboxes.sty
+beamerbasecolor.sty
+beamerbasecompatibility.sty
+beamerbasedecode.sty
+beamerbaseexercise.sty
+beamerbasefont.sty
+beamerbaseframe.sty
+beamerbaseframecomponents.sty
+beamerbaseframesize.sty
+beamerbaselocalstructure.sty
+beamerbasemisc.sty
+beamerbasemodes.sty
+beamerbasenavigation.sty
+beamerbasenotes.sty
+beamerbaseoptions.sty
+beamerbaseoverlay.sty
+beamerbaserequires.sty
+beamerbasesection.sty
+beamerbasetemplates.sty
+beamerbasethemes.sty
+beamerbasetheorems.sty
+beamerbasetitle.sty
+beamerbasetoc.sty
+beamerbasetranslator.sty
+beamerbasetwoscreens.sty
+beamerbaseverbatim.sty
+emulation/
+multimedia/
+patch/
+themes/
+
+base/art:
+beamericonarticle.20.eps
+beamericonarticle.20.pdf
+beamericonarticle.eps
+beamericonarticle.pdf
+beamericonarticle.tex
+beamericonbook.20.eps
+beamericonbook.20.pdf
+beamericonbook.eps
+beamericonbook.pdf
+beamericonbook.tex
+beamericononline.20.eps
+beamericononline.20.pdf
+beamericononline.eps
+beamericononline.pdf
+
+base/emulation:
+beamerfoils.sty
+beamerprosper.sty
+beamerseminar.sty
+beamertexpower.sty
+
+base/multimedia:
+multimedia.sty
+multimediasymbols.sty
+xmpmulti.sty
+
+base/patch:
+beamerpatchparalist.sty
+
+base/themes:
+color/
+font/
+inner/
+outer/
+theme/
+
+base/themes/color:
+beamercolorthemealbatross.sty
+beamercolorthemebeaver.sty
+beamercolorthemebeetle.sty
+beamercolorthemecrane.sty
+beamercolorthemedefault.sty
+beamercolorthemedolphin.sty
+beamercolorthemedove.sty
+beamercolorthemefly.sty
+beamercolorthemelily.sty
+beamercolorthememonarca.sty
+beamercolorthemeorchid.sty
+beamercolorthemerose.sty
+beamercolorthemeseagull.sty
+beamercolorthemeseahorse.sty
+beamercolorthemesidebartab.sty
+beamercolorthemespruce.sty
+beamercolorthemestructure.sty
+beamercolorthemewhale.sty
+beamercolorthemewolverine.sty
+
+base/themes/font:
+beamerfontthemedefault.sty
+beamerfontthemeprofessionalfonts.sty
+beamerfontthemeserif.sty
+beamerfontthemestructurebold.sty
+beamerfontthemestructureitalicserif.sty
+beamerfontthemestructuresmallcapsserif.sty
+
+base/themes/inner:
+beamerinnerthemecircles.sty
+beamerinnerthemedefault.sty
+beamerinnerthemeinmargin.sty
+beamerinnerthemerectangles.sty
+beamerinnerthemerounded.sty
+
+base/themes/outer:
+beamerouterthemedefault.sty
+beamerouterthemeinfolines.sty
+beamerouterthememiniframes.sty
+beamerouterthemeshadow.sty
+beamerouterthemesidebar.sty
+beamerouterthemesmoothbars.sty
+beamerouterthemesmoothtree.sty
+beamerouterthemesplit.sty
+beamerouterthemetree.sty
+
+base/themes/theme:
+beamerthemeAnnArbor.sty
+beamerthemeAntibes.sty
+beamerthemeBergen.sty
+beamerthemeBerkeley.sty
+beamerthemeBerlin.sty
+beamerthemeBoadilla.sty
+beamerthemeboxes.sty
+beamerthemeCambridgeUS.sty
+beamerthemeCopenhagen.sty
+beamerthemeDarmstadt.sty
+beamerthemedefault.sty
+beamerthemeDresden.sty
+beamerthemeEastLansing.sty
+beamerthemeFrankfurt.sty
+beamerthemeGoettingen.sty
+beamerthemeHannover.sty
+beamerthemeIlmenau.sty
+beamerthemeJuanLesPins.sty
+beamerthemeLuebeck.sty
+beamerthemeMadrid.sty
+beamerthemeMalmoe.sty
+beamerthemeMarburg.sty
+beamerthemeMontpellier.sty
+beamerthemePaloAlto.sty
+beamerthemePittsburgh.sty
+beamerthemeRochester.sty
+beamerthemeSingapore.sty
+beamerthemeSzeged.sty
+beamerthemeWarsaw.sty
+compatibility/
+
+base/themes/theme/compatibility:
+beamerthemebars.sty
+beamerthemeclassic.sty
+beamerthemecompatibility.sty
+beamerthemelined.sty
+beamerthemeplain.sty
+beamerthemeshadow.sty
+beamerthemesidebar.sty
+beamerthemesplit.sty
+beamerthemetree.sty
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-code.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+doc:
+beamercolorthemeexample.tex
+beamerfontthemeexample.tex
+beamerinnerthemeexample.tex
+beamerlogo.pdf
+beamerouterthemeexample.tex
+beamerthemeexample.tex
+beamerthemeexamplebase.tex
+beamerug-animations.tex
+beamerug-color.tex
+beamerug-compatibility.tex
+beamerug-elements.tex
+beamerug-emulation.tex
+beamerug-fonts.tex
+beamerug-frames.tex
+beamerug-globalstructure.tex
+beamerug-graphics.tex
+beamerug-guidelines.tex
+beamerug-installation.tex
+beamerug-interaction.tex
+beamerug-introduction.tex
+beamerug-license.tex
+beamerug-localstructure.tex
+beamerug-macros.tex
+beamerug-nonpresentation.tex
+beamerug-notes.tex
+beamerug-overlays.tex
+beamerug-solutions.tex
+beamerug-themes.tex
+beamerug-transparencies.tex
+beamerug-tricks.tex
+beamerug-tutorial.tex
+beamerug-twoscreens.tex
+beamerug-workflow.tex
+beameruserguide.tex
+emulation-examples/
+examples/
+licenses/
+solutions/
+
+doc/emulation-examples:
+beamerexample-foils.tex
+beamerexample-prosper.tex
+beamerexample-seminar.tex
+beamerexample-texpower.tex
+
+doc/examples:
+a-conference-talk/
+a-lecture/
+
+doc/examples/a-conference-talk/:
+beamerexample-conference-talk.tex
+
+doc/examples/a-lecture/:
+beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex
+beamerexample-lecture-body.tex
+beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
+beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
+beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
+beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
+beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
+beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
+beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
+beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex
+beamerexample-lecture-style.tex
+
+doc/licenses:
+fdl.txt
+gpl-2.0.txt
+lppl-1-3c.txt
+manifest-code.txt
+manifest-documentation.txt
+
+doc/solutions:
+conference-talks/
+generic-talks/
+short-talks/
+
+doc/solutions/conference-talks:
+conference-ornate-20min.de.tex
+conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex
+conference-ornate-20min.en.tex
+
+doc/solutions/generic-talks:
+generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex
+generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex
+generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex
+
+doc/solutions/short-talks:
+speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex
+speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex
+speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex
\ No newline at end of file
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/licenses/manifest-documentation.txt
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/lppl-1-3c.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,416 +0,0 @@
-The LaTeX Project Public License
-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-
-
-LPPL Version 1.3c 2008-05-04
-
-Copyright 1999 2002-2008 LaTeX3 Project
- Everyone is allowed to distribute verbatim copies of this
- license document, but modification of it is not allowed.
-
-
-PREAMBLE
-========
-
-The LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) is the primary license under
-which the LaTeX kernel and the base LaTeX packages are distributed.
-
-You may use this license for any work of which you hold the copyright
-and which you wish to distribute. This license may be particularly
-suitable if your work is TeX-related (such as a LaTeX package), but
-it is written in such a way that you can use it even if your work is
-unrelated to TeX.
-
-The section `WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE',
-below, gives instructions, examples, and recommendations for authors
-who are considering distributing their works under this license.
-
-This license gives conditions under which a work may be distributed
-and modified, as well as conditions under which modified versions of
-that work may be distributed.
-
-We, the LaTeX3 Project, believe that the conditions below give you
-the freedom to make and distribute modified versions of your work
-that conform with whatever technical specifications you wish while
-maintaining the availability, integrity, and reliability of
-that work. If you do not see how to achieve your goal while
-meeting these conditions, then read the document `cfgguide.tex'
-and `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution for suggestions.
-
-
-DEFINITIONS
-===========
-
-In this license document the following terms are used:
-
- `Work'
- Any work being distributed under this License.
-
- `Derived Work'
- Any work that under any applicable law is derived from the Work.
-
- `Modification'
- Any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any applicable
- law -- for example, the production of a file containing an
- original file associated with the Work or a significant portion of
- such a file, either verbatim or with modifications and/or
- translated into another language.
-
- `Modify'
- To apply any procedure that produces a Derived Work under any
- applicable law.
-
- `Distribution'
- Making copies of the Work available from one person to another, in
- whole or in part. Distribution includes (but is not limited to)
- making any electronic components of the Work accessible by
- file transfer protocols such as FTP or HTTP or by shared file
- systems such as Sun's Network File System (NFS).
-
- `Compiled Work'
- A version of the Work that has been processed into a form where it
- is directly usable on a computer system. This processing may
- include using installation facilities provided by the Work,
- transformations of the Work, copying of components of the Work, or
- other activities. Note that modification of any installation
- facilities provided by the Work constitutes modification of the Work.
-
- `Current Maintainer'
- A person or persons nominated as such within the Work. If there is
- no such explicit nomination then it is the `Copyright Holder' under
- any applicable law.
-
- `Base Interpreter'
- A program or process that is normally needed for running or
- interpreting a part or the whole of the Work.
-
- A Base Interpreter may depend on external components but these
- are not considered part of the Base Interpreter provided that each
- external component clearly identifies itself whenever it is used
- interactively. Unless explicitly specified when applying the
- license to the Work, the only applicable Base Interpreter is a
- `LaTeX-Format' or in the case of files belonging to the
- `LaTeX-format' a program implementing the `TeX language'.
-
-
-
-CONDITIONS ON DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
-===========================================
-
-1. Activities other than distribution and/or modification of the Work
-are not covered by this license; they are outside its scope. In
-particular, the act of running the Work is not restricted and no
-requirements are made concerning any offers of support for the Work.
-
-2. You may distribute a complete, unmodified copy of the Work as you
-received it. Distribution of only part of the Work is considered
-modification of the Work, and no right to distribute such a Derived
-Work may be assumed under the terms of this clause.
-
-3. You may distribute a Compiled Work that has been generated from a
-complete, unmodified copy of the Work as distributed under Clause 2
-above, as long as that Compiled Work is distributed in such a way that
-the recipients may install the Compiled Work on their system exactly
-as it would have been installed if they generated a Compiled Work
-directly from the Work.
-
-4. If you are the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may, without
-restriction, modify the Work, thus creating a Derived Work. You may
-also distribute the Derived Work without restriction, including
-Compiled Works generated from the Derived Work. Derived Works
-distributed in this manner by the Current Maintainer are considered to
-be updated versions of the Work.
-
-5. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may modify
-your copy of the Work, thus creating a Derived Work based on the Work,
-and compile this Derived Work, thus creating a Compiled Work based on
-the Derived Work.
-
-6. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
-distribute a Derived Work provided the following conditions are met
-for every component of the Work unless that component clearly states
-in the copyright notice that it is exempt from that condition. Only
-the Current Maintainer is allowed to add such statements of exemption
-to a component of the Work.
-
- a. If a component of this Derived Work can be a direct replacement
- for a component of the Work when that component is used with the
- Base Interpreter, then, wherever this component of the Work
- identifies itself to the user when used interactively with that
- Base Interpreter, the replacement component of this Derived Work
- clearly and unambiguously identifies itself as a modified version
- of this component to the user when used interactively with that
- Base Interpreter.
-
- b. Every component of the Derived Work contains prominent notices
- detailing the nature of the changes to that component, or a
- prominent reference to another file that is distributed as part
- of the Derived Work and that contains a complete and accurate log
- of the changes.
-
- c. No information in the Derived Work implies that any persons,
- including (but not limited to) the authors of the original version
- of the Work, provide any support, including (but not limited to)
- the reporting and handling of errors, to recipients of the
- Derived Work unless those persons have stated explicitly that
- they do provide such support for the Derived Work.
-
- d. You distribute at least one of the following with the Derived Work:
-
- 1. A complete, unmodified copy of the Work;
- if your distribution of a modified component is made by
- offering access to copy the modified component from a
- designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy
- the Work from the same or some similar place meets this
- condition, even though third parties are not compelled to
- copy the Work along with the modified component;
-
- 2. Information that is sufficient to obtain a complete,
- unmodified copy of the Work.
-
-7. If you are not the Current Maintainer of the Work, you may
-distribute a Compiled Work generated from a Derived Work, as long as
-the Derived Work is distributed to all recipients of the Compiled
-Work, and as long as the conditions of Clause 6, above, are met with
-regard to the Derived Work.
-
-8. The conditions above are not intended to prohibit, and hence do not
-apply to, the modification, by any method, of any component so that it
-becomes identical to an updated version of that component of the Work as
-it is distributed by the Current Maintainer under Clause 4, above.
-
-9. Distribution of the Work or any Derived Work in an alternative
-format, where the Work or that Derived Work (in whole or in part) is
-then produced by applying some process to that format, does not relax or
-nullify any sections of this license as they pertain to the results of
-applying that process.
-
-10. a. A Derived Work may be distributed under a different license
- provided that license itself honors the conditions listed in
- Clause 6 above, in regard to the Work, though it does not have
- to honor the rest of the conditions in this license.
-
- b. If a Derived Work is distributed under a different license, that
- Derived Work must provide sufficient documentation as part of
- itself to allow each recipient of that Derived Work to honor the
- restrictions in Clause 6 above, concerning changes from the Work.
-
-11. This license places no restrictions on works that are unrelated to
-the Work, nor does this license place any restrictions on aggregating
-such works with the Work by any means.
-
-12. Nothing in this license is intended to, or may be used to, prevent
-complete compliance by all parties with all applicable laws.
-
-
-NO WARRANTY
-===========
-
-There is no warranty for the Work. Except when otherwise stated in
-writing, the Copyright Holder provides the Work `as is', without
-warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, but not
-limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
-particular purpose. The entire risk as to the quality and performance
-of the Work is with you. Should the Work prove defective, you assume
-the cost of all necessary servicing, repair, or correction.
-
-In no event unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing
-will The Copyright Holder, or any author named in the components of the
-Work, or any other party who may distribute and/or modify the Work as
-permitted above, be liable to you for damages, including any general,
-special, incidental or consequential damages arising out of any use of
-the Work or out of inability to use the Work (including, but not limited
-to, loss of data, data being rendered inaccurate, or losses sustained by
-anyone as a result of any failure of the Work to operate with any other
-programs), even if the Copyright Holder or said author or said other
-party has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
-
-
-MAINTENANCE OF THE WORK
-=======================
-
-The Work has the status `author-maintained' if the Copyright Holder
-explicitly and prominently states near the primary copyright notice in
-the Work that the Work can only be maintained by the Copyright Holder
-or simply that it is `author-maintained'.
-
-The Work has the status `maintained' if there is a Current Maintainer
-who has indicated in the Work that they are willing to receive error
-reports for the Work (for example, by supplying a valid e-mail
-address). It is not required for the Current Maintainer to acknowledge
-or act upon these error reports.
-
-The Work changes from status `maintained' to `unmaintained' if there
-is no Current Maintainer, or the person stated to be Current
-Maintainer of the work cannot be reached through the indicated means
-of communication for a period of six months, and there are no other
-significant signs of active maintenance.
-
-You can become the Current Maintainer of the Work by agreement with
-any existing Current Maintainer to take over this role.
-
-If the Work is unmaintained, you can become the Current Maintainer of
-the Work through the following steps:
-
- 1. Make a reasonable attempt to trace the Current Maintainer (and
- the Copyright Holder, if the two differ) through the means of
- an Internet or similar search.
-
- 2. If this search is successful, then enquire whether the Work
- is still maintained.
-
- a. If it is being maintained, then ask the Current Maintainer
- to update their communication data within one month.
-
- b. If the search is unsuccessful or no action to resume active
- maintenance is taken by the Current Maintainer, then announce
- within the pertinent community your intention to take over
- maintenance. (If the Work is a LaTeX work, this could be
- done, for example, by posting to comp.text.tex.)
-
- 3a. If the Current Maintainer is reachable and agrees to pass
- maintenance of the Work to you, then this takes effect
- immediately upon announcement.
-
- b. If the Current Maintainer is not reachable and the Copyright
- Holder agrees that maintenance of the Work be passed to you,
- then this takes effect immediately upon announcement.
-
- 4. If you make an `intention announcement' as described in 2b. above
- and after three months your intention is challenged neither by
- the Current Maintainer nor by the Copyright Holder nor by other
- people, then you may arrange for the Work to be changed so as
- to name you as the (new) Current Maintainer.
-
- 5. If the previously unreachable Current Maintainer becomes
- reachable once more within three months of a change completed
- under the terms of 3b) or 4), then that Current Maintainer must
- become or remain the Current Maintainer upon request provided
- they then update their communication data within one month.
-
-A change in the Current Maintainer does not, of itself, alter the fact
-that the Work is distributed under the LPPL license.
-
-If you become the Current Maintainer of the Work, you should
-immediately provide, within the Work, a prominent and unambiguous
-statement of your status as Current Maintainer. You should also
-announce your new status to the same pertinent community as
-in 2b) above.
-
-
-WHETHER AND HOW TO DISTRIBUTE WORKS UNDER THIS LICENSE
-======================================================
-
-This section contains important instructions, examples, and
-recommendations for authors who are considering distributing their
-works under this license. These authors are addressed as `you' in
-this section.
-
-Choosing This License or Another License
-----------------------------------------
-
-If for any part of your work you want or need to use *distribution*
-conditions that differ significantly from those in this license, then
-do not refer to this license anywhere in your work but, instead,
-distribute your work under a different license. You may use the text
-of this license as a model for your own license, but your license
-should not refer to the LPPL or otherwise give the impression that
-your work is distributed under the LPPL.
-
-The document `modguide.tex' in the base LaTeX distribution explains
-the motivation behind the conditions of this license. It explains,
-for example, why distributing LaTeX under the GNU General Public
-License (GPL) was considered inappropriate. Even if your work is
-unrelated to LaTeX, the discussion in `modguide.tex' may still be
-relevant, and authors intending to distribute their works under any
-license are encouraged to read it.
-
-A Recommendation on Modification Without Distribution
------------------------------------------------------
-
-It is wise never to modify a component of the Work, even for your own
-personal use, without also meeting the above conditions for
-distributing the modified component. While you might intend that such
-modifications will never be distributed, often this will happen by
-accident -- you may forget that you have modified that component; or
-it may not occur to you when allowing others to access the modified
-version that you are thus distributing it and violating the conditions
-of this license in ways that could have legal implications and, worse,
-cause problems for the community. It is therefore usually in your
-best interest to keep your copy of the Work identical with the public
-one. Many works provide ways to control the behavior of that work
-without altering any of its licensed components.
-
-How to Use This License
------------------------
-
-To use this license, place in each of the components of your work both
-an explicit copyright notice including your name and the year the work
-was authored and/or last substantially modified. Include also a
-statement that the distribution and/or modification of that
-component is constrained by the conditions in this license.
-
-Here is an example of such a notice and statement:
-
- %% pig.dtx
- %% Copyright 2005 M. Y. Name
- %
- % This work may be distributed and/or modified under the
- % conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
- % of this license or (at your option) any later version.
- % The latest version of this license is in
- % http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
- % and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
- % version 2005/12/01 or later.
- %
- % This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained'.
- %
- % The Current Maintainer of this work is M. Y. Name.
- %
- % This work consists of the files pig.dtx and pig.ins
- % and the derived file pig.sty.
-
-Given such a notice and statement in a file, the conditions
-given in this license document would apply, with the `Work' referring
-to the three files `pig.dtx', `pig.ins', and `pig.sty' (the last being
-generated from `pig.dtx' using `pig.ins'), the `Base Interpreter'
-referring to any `LaTeX-Format', and both `Copyright Holder' and
-`Current Maintainer' referring to the person `M. Y. Name'.
-
-If you do not want the Maintenance section of LPPL to apply to your
-Work, change `maintained' above into `author-maintained'.
-However, we recommend that you use `maintained', as the Maintenance
-section was added in order to ensure that your Work remains useful to
-the community even when you can no longer maintain and support it
-yourself.
-
-Derived Works That Are Not Replacements
----------------------------------------
-
-Several clauses of the LPPL specify means to provide reliability and
-stability for the user community. They therefore concern themselves
-with the case that a Derived Work is intended to be used as a
-(compatible or incompatible) replacement of the original Work. If
-this is not the case (e.g., if a few lines of code are reused for a
-completely different task), then clauses 6b and 6d shall not apply.
-
-
-Important Recommendations
--------------------------
-
- Defining What Constitutes the Work
-
- The LPPL requires that distributions of the Work contain all the
- files of the Work. It is therefore important that you provide a
- way for the licensee to determine which files constitute the Work.
- This could, for example, be achieved by explicitly listing all the
- files of the Work near the copyright notice of each file or by
- using a line such as:
-
- % This work consists of all files listed in manifest.txt.
-
- in that place. In the absence of an unequivocal list it might be
- impossible for the licensee to determine what is considered by you
- to comprise the Work and, in such a case, the licensee would be
- entitled to make reasonable conjectures as to which files comprise
- the Work.
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-code.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
-base:
-art/
-beamer.cls
-beamerarticle.sty
-beamerbasearticle.sty
-beamerbaseauxtemplates.sty
-beamerbaseboxes.sty
-beamerbasecolor.sty
-beamerbasecompatibility.sty
-beamerbasedecode.sty
-beamerbaseexercise.sty
-beamerbasefont.sty
-beamerbaseframe.sty
-beamerbaseframecomponents.sty
-beamerbaseframesize.sty
-beamerbaselocalstructure.sty
-beamerbasemisc.sty
-beamerbasemodes.sty
-beamerbasenavigation.sty
-beamerbasenotes.sty
-beamerbaseoptions.sty
-beamerbaseoverlay.sty
-beamerbaserequires.sty
-beamerbasesection.sty
-beamerbasetemplates.sty
-beamerbasethemes.sty
-beamerbasetheorems.sty
-beamerbasetitle.sty
-beamerbasetoc.sty
-beamerbasetranslator.sty
-beamerbasetwoscreens.sty
-beamerbaseverbatim.sty
-emulation/
-multimedia/
-patch/
-themes/
-
-base/art:
-beamericonarticle.20.eps
-beamericonarticle.20.pdf
-beamericonarticle.eps
-beamericonarticle.pdf
-beamericonarticle.tex
-beamericonbook.20.eps
-beamericonbook.20.pdf
-beamericonbook.eps
-beamericonbook.pdf
-beamericonbook.tex
-beamericononline.20.eps
-beamericononline.20.pdf
-beamericononline.eps
-beamericononline.pdf
-
-base/emulation:
-beamerfoils.sty
-beamerprosper.sty
-beamerseminar.sty
-beamertexpower.sty
-
-base/multimedia:
-multimedia.sty
-multimediasymbols.sty
-xmpmulti.sty
-
-base/patch:
-beamerpatchparalist.sty
-
-base/themes:
-color/
-font/
-inner/
-outer/
-theme/
-
-base/themes/color:
-beamercolorthemealbatross.sty
-beamercolorthemebeaver.sty
-beamercolorthemebeetle.sty
-beamercolorthemecrane.sty
-beamercolorthemedefault.sty
-beamercolorthemedolphin.sty
-beamercolorthemedove.sty
-beamercolorthemefly.sty
-beamercolorthemelily.sty
-beamercolorthememonarca.sty
-beamercolorthemeorchid.sty
-beamercolorthemerose.sty
-beamercolorthemeseagull.sty
-beamercolorthemeseahorse.sty
-beamercolorthemesidebartab.sty
-beamercolorthemespruce.sty
-beamercolorthemestructure.sty
-beamercolorthemewhale.sty
-beamercolorthemewolverine.sty
-
-base/themes/font:
-beamerfontthemedefault.sty
-beamerfontthemeprofessionalfonts.sty
-beamerfontthemeserif.sty
-beamerfontthemestructurebold.sty
-beamerfontthemestructureitalicserif.sty
-beamerfontthemestructuresmallcapsserif.sty
-
-base/themes/inner:
-beamerinnerthemecircles.sty
-beamerinnerthemedefault.sty
-beamerinnerthemeinmargin.sty
-beamerinnerthemerectangles.sty
-beamerinnerthemerounded.sty
-
-base/themes/outer:
-beamerouterthemedefault.sty
-beamerouterthemeinfolines.sty
-beamerouterthememiniframes.sty
-beamerouterthemeshadow.sty
-beamerouterthemesidebar.sty
-beamerouterthemesmoothbars.sty
-beamerouterthemesmoothtree.sty
-beamerouterthemesplit.sty
-beamerouterthemetree.sty
-
-base/themes/theme:
-beamerthemeAnnArbor.sty
-beamerthemeAntibes.sty
-beamerthemeBergen.sty
-beamerthemeBerkeley.sty
-beamerthemeBerlin.sty
-beamerthemeBoadilla.sty
-beamerthemeboxes.sty
-beamerthemeCambridgeUS.sty
-beamerthemeCopenhagen.sty
-beamerthemeDarmstadt.sty
-beamerthemedefault.sty
-beamerthemeDresden.sty
-beamerthemeEastLansing.sty
-beamerthemeFrankfurt.sty
-beamerthemeGoettingen.sty
-beamerthemeHannover.sty
-beamerthemeIlmenau.sty
-beamerthemeJuanLesPins.sty
-beamerthemeLuebeck.sty
-beamerthemeMadrid.sty
-beamerthemeMalmoe.sty
-beamerthemeMarburg.sty
-beamerthemeMontpellier.sty
-beamerthemePaloAlto.sty
-beamerthemePittsburgh.sty
-beamerthemeRochester.sty
-beamerthemeSingapore.sty
-beamerthemeSzeged.sty
-beamerthemeWarsaw.sty
-compatibility/
-
-base/themes/theme/compatibility:
-beamerthemebars.sty
-beamerthemeclassic.sty
-beamerthemecompatibility.sty
-beamerthemelined.sty
-beamerthemeplain.sty
-beamerthemeshadow.sty
-beamerthemesidebar.sty
-beamerthemesplit.sty
-beamerthemetree.sty
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/manifest-documentation.txt 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,92 +0,0 @@
-doc:
-beamercolorthemeexample.tex
-beamerfontthemeexample.tex
-beamerinnerthemeexample.tex
-beamerlogo.pdf
-beamerouterthemeexample.tex
-beamerthemeexample.tex
-beamerthemeexamplebase.tex
-beamerug-animations.tex
-beamerug-color.tex
-beamerug-compatibility.tex
-beamerug-elements.tex
-beamerug-emulation.tex
-beamerug-fonts.tex
-beamerug-frames.tex
-beamerug-globalstructure.tex
-beamerug-graphics.tex
-beamerug-guidelines.tex
-beamerug-installation.tex
-beamerug-interaction.tex
-beamerug-introduction.tex
-beamerug-license.tex
-beamerug-localstructure.tex
-beamerug-macros.tex
-beamerug-nonpresentation.tex
-beamerug-notes.tex
-beamerug-overlays.tex
-beamerug-solutions.tex
-beamerug-themes.tex
-beamerug-transparencies.tex
-beamerug-tricks.tex
-beamerug-tutorial.tex
-beamerug-twoscreens.tex
-beamerug-workflow.tex
-beameruserguide.tex
-emulation-examples/
-examples/
-licenses/
-solutions/
-
-doc/emulation-examples:
-beamerexample-foils.tex
-beamerexample-prosper.tex
-beamerexample-seminar.tex
-beamerexample-texpower.tex
-
-doc/examples:
-a-conference-talk/
-a-lecture/
-
-doc/examples/a-conference-talk/:
-beamerexample-conference-talk.tex
-
-doc/examples/a-lecture/:
-beamerexample-lecture-beamer-version.tex
-beamerexample-lecture-body.tex
-beamerexample-lecture-logo.pdf
-beamerexample-lecture-pic1.jpg
-beamerexample-lecture-pic2.jpg
-beamerexample-lecture-pic3.jpg
-beamerexample-lecture-pic4.jpg
-beamerexample-lecture-pic5.jpg
-beamerexample-lecture-pic6.jpg
-beamerexample-lecture-print-version.tex
-beamerexample-lecture-style.tex
-
-doc/licenses:
-fdl.txt
-gpl-2.0.txt
-lppl-1-3c.txt
-manifest-code.txt
-manifest-documentation.txt
-
-doc/solutions:
-conference-talks/
-generic-talks/
-short-talks/
-
-doc/solutions/conference-talks:
-conference-ornate-20min.de.tex
-conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex
-conference-ornate-20min.en.tex
-
-doc/solutions/generic-talks:
-generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex
-generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex
-generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex
-
-doc/solutions/short-talks:
-speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex
-speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex
-speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex
\ No newline at end of file
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+% $Header$
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% Diese Datei enth\xE4lt eine L\xF6sungsvorlage f\xFCr:
+
+% - Vortr\xE4ge bei einer (deutschsprachigen) Konferenz/einem Kolloquium.
+% - Vortragsl\xE4nge von etwa 20 Minuten.
+% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschn\xF6rkelt/dekorativ.
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
+% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
+% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
+% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
+% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
+% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
+% notice.
+
+
+
+\mode<presentation>
+{
+ \usetheme{Warsaw}
+ % oder ...
+
+ \setbeamercovered{transparent}
+ % oder auch nicht
+}
+
+
+\usepackage[german]{babel}
+% oder was auch immer
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% oder was auch immer
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen
+% m\xFCssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile
+% mit fontenc zu l\xF6schen.
+
+
+\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln n\xF6tig)
+{Titel wie im Tagunsband angegeben\\ (u.U.\ also englisch)}
+
+\subtitle
+{Untertitel nur angeben, wenn es einen im Tagungsband gibt}
+
+\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren)
+{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}}
+% - Namen m\xFCssen in derselben Reihenfolge wie im Papier erscheinen.
+% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
+% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
+
+\institute[Universit\xE4ten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft n\xF6tig)
+{
+ \inst{1}%
+ Institut f\xFCr Informatik\\
+ Universit\xE4t Hier
+ \and
+ \inst{2}%
+ Institut f\xFCr theoretische Philosophie\\
+ Universit\xE4t Dort}
+% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
+% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
+% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich f\xFCr die genau Adresse.
+
+\date[KPT 2003] % (optional, sollte der abgek\xFCrzte Konferenzname sein)
+{Konferenz \xFCber Pr\xE4sentationstechniken, 2004}
+% - Vollee oder abgek\xFCrzter Name sind m\xF6glich.
+% - Dieser Eintrag ist nicht f\xFCr das Publikum gedacht (das wei\xDF
+% n\xE4mlich, bei welcher Konferenz es ist), sondern f\xFCr Leute, die die
+% Folien sp\xE4ter lesen.
+
+\subject{Informatik}
+% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einf\xFCgt. Kann gut
+% weggelassen werden.
+
+
+% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden
+% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat
+% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einf\xFCgen:
+
+% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
+% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
+
+
+
+% Folgendes sollte gel\xF6scht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes
+% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen m\xF6chte.
+\AtBeginSubsection[]
+{
+ \begin{frame}<beamer>{Gliederung}
+ \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
+ \end{frame}
+}
+
+
+% Falls Aufz\xE4hlungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann
+% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden:
+
+%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
+
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \titlepage
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Gliederung}
+ \tableofcontents
+ % Die Option [pausesections] k\xF6nnte n\xFCtzlich sein.
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+% Einen Vortrag zu strukturieren ist nicht immer einfach. Die
+% nachfolgende Struktur kann unangemessen sein. Hier ein paar Regeln,
+% die f\xFCr diese L\xF6sungsvorlage gelten:
+
+% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der
+% Zusammenfassung).
+% - *H\xF6chstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt.
+% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also
+% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben.
+
+% - Konferenzteilnehmer wissen oft wenig von der Materie des
+% Vortrags. Deshalb: vereinfachen!
+% - In 20 Minuten ist es schon schwer genug, die Hauptbotschaft zu
+% vermitteln. Deshalb sollten Details ausgelassen werden, selbst
+% wenn dies zu Ungenauigkeiten oder Halbwahrheiten f\xFChrt.
+% - Falls man Details wegl\xE4sst, die eigentlich wichtig f\xFCr einen
+% Beweis/Implementation sind, so sagt man dies einmal n\xFCchtern. Alle
+% werden damit gl\xFCcklich sein.
+
+\section{Motivation}
+
+\subsection{Das behandelte Problem}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.\\
+ Korrekte Gro\xDF-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.}
+ % - Eine \xDCberschrift fasst einen Rahmen verst\xE4ndlich zusammen. Man
+ % muss sie verstehen k\xF6nnen, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des
+ % Rahmens versteht.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen.
+ \item
+ Sehr kurze S\xE4tze oder Satzglieder verwenden.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+
+ Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Erster Punkt.
+ \pause
+ \item
+ Zweiter Punkt.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<3->
+ Erster Punkt.
+ \item<4->
+ Zweiter Punkt.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \uncover<5->{\item
+ Erster Punkt.}
+ \uncover<6->{\item
+ Zweiter Punkt.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Fr\xFChere Arbeiten}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\section{Unsere Resultate/Beitrag}
+
+\subsection{Hauptresultate}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\subsection{Beweis-/Implementationsideen}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section*{Zusammenfassung}
+
+\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung}
+
+ % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
+ \item
+ Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
+ \item
+ Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional.
+ \vskip0pt plus.5fill
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Ausblick
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Etwas, was wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
+ \item
+ Nochwas, das wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+% Alles nachfolgende ist optional und typischerweise nicht n\xF6tig.
+\appendix
+\section<presentation>*{\appendixname}
+\subsection<presentation>*{Weiterf\xFChrende Literatur}
+
+\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks]
+ \frametitle<presentation>{Weiterf\xFChrende Literatur}
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{10}
+
+ \beamertemplatebookbibitems
+ % Anfangen sollte man mit \xDCbersichtswerken.
+
+ \bibitem{Autor1990}
+ A.~Autor.
+ \newblock {\em Einf\xFChrung in das Pr\xE4sentationswesen}.
+ \newblock Klein-Verlag, 1990.
+
+
+ \beamertemplatearticlebibitems
+ % Vertiefende Literatur kommt sp\xE4ter. Die Liste sollte kurz sein.
+
+ \bibitem{Jemand2000}
+ S.~Jemand.
+ \newblock On this and that.
+ \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100, 2000.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.de.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,285 @@
+% $Header$
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% This file is a solution template for:
+
+% - Talk at a conference/colloquium.
+% - Talk length is about 20min.
+% - Style is ornate.
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
+% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
+% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
+% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
+% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
+% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
+% notice.
+
+
+\mode<presentation>
+{
+ \usetheme{Warsaw}
+ % or ...
+
+ \setbeamercovered{transparent}
+ % or whatever (possibly just delete it)
+}
+
+
+\usepackage[english]{babel}
+% or whatever
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% or whatever
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1
+% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc.
+
+
+\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles)
+{Title As It Is In the Proceedings}
+
+\subtitle
+{Include Only If Paper Has a Subtitle}
+
+\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors)
+{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}}
+% - Give the names in the same order as the appear in the paper.
+% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different
+% affiliation.
+
+\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed)
+{
+ \inst{1}%
+ Department of Computer Science\\
+ University of Somewhere
+ \and
+ \inst{2}%
+ Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\
+ University of Elsewhere}
+% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations.
+% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address.
+
+\date[CFP 2003] % (optional, should be abbreviation of conference name)
+{Conference on Fabulous Presentations, 2003}
+% - Either use conference name or its abbreviation.
+% - Not really informative to the audience, more for people (including
+% yourself) who are reading the slides online
+
+\subject{Theoretical Computer Science}
+% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left
+% out.
+
+
+
+% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx
+% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex,
+% resp., then you can add a logo as follows:
+
+% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
+% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
+
+
+
+% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at
+% the beginning of each subsection:
+\AtBeginSubsection[]
+{
+ \begin{frame}<beamer>{Outline}
+ \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
+ \end{frame}
+}
+
+
+% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment
+% the following command:
+
+%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \titlepage
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Outline}
+ \tableofcontents
+ % You might wish to add the option [pausesections]
+\end{frame}
+
+
+% Structuring a talk is a difficult task and the following structure
+% may not be suitable. Here are some rules that apply for this
+% solution:
+
+% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary).
+% - At *most* three subsections per section.
+% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about
+% 15 and 30 frames, all told.
+
+% - A conference audience is likely to know very little of what you
+% are going to talk about. So *simplify*!
+% - In a 20min talk, getting the main ideas across is hard
+% enough. Leave out details, even if it means being less precise than
+% you think necessary.
+% - If you omit details that are vital to the proof/implementation,
+% just say so once. Everybody will be happy with that.
+
+\section{Motivation}
+
+\subsection{The Basic Problem That We Studied}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.}
+ % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion
+ % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Use \texttt{itemize} a lot.
+ \item
+ Use very short sentences or short phrases.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+
+ You can create overlays\dots
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item using the \texttt{pause} command:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ First item.
+ \pause
+ \item
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ using overlay specifications:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<3->
+ First item.
+ \item<4->
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ using the general \texttt{uncover} command:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \uncover<5->{\item
+ First item.}
+ \uncover<6->{\item
+ Second item.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Previous Work}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section{Our Results/Contribution}
+
+\subsection{Main Results}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Basic Ideas for Proofs/Implementation}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section*{Summary}
+
+\begin{frame}{Summary}
+
+ % Keep the summary *very short*.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
+ \item
+ The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
+ \item
+ Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ % The following outlook is optional.
+ \vskip0pt plus.5fill
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Outlook
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Something you haven't solved.
+ \item
+ Something else you haven't solved.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+% All of the following is optional and typically not needed.
+\appendix
+\section<presentation>*{\appendixname}
+\subsection<presentation>*{For Further Reading}
+
+\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks]
+ \frametitle<presentation>{For Further Reading}
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{10}
+
+ \beamertemplatebookbibitems
+ % Start with overview books.
+
+ \bibitem{Author1990}
+ A.~Author.
+ \newblock {\em Handbook of Everything}.
+ \newblock Some Press, 1990.
+
+
+ \beamertemplatearticlebibitems
+ % Followed by interesting articles. Keep the list short.
+
+ \bibitem{Someone2000}
+ S.~Someone.
+ \newblock On this and that.
+ \newblock {\em Journal of This and That}, 2(1):50--100,
+ 2000.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.en.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,297 @@
+% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% Ce fichier est un exemple d'expos\xE9
+
+% - pour des conf\xE9rences,
+% - d'une dur\xE9e approximative de 20 minutes,
+% - avec un style ornemental.
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa <philippejjg at free.fr>
+%
+% En principe, ce fichier peut \xEAtre redistribu\xE9 et/ou modifi\xE9 conform\xE9ment
+% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% Cependant, ce fichier est suppos\xE9 comme \xE9tant un "exemple-type" qui peut \xEAtre modifi\xE9
+% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu'
+% "exemple-type" et non sp\xE9cifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un
+% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et
+% de modifier ce fichier et m\xEAme d'effacer ce message de copyright.
+
+
+\mode<presentation> {
+ \usetheme{Warsaw}
+ % ou autre ...
+
+ \setbeamercovered{transparent}
+ % ou autre chose (il est \xE9galement possible de supprimer cette ligne)
+}
+
+
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel}
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% or autre
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent \xEAtre assortis. Si T1
+% ne para\xEEt pas tr\xE8s esth\xE9tique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc.
+
+
+\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long)
+{Tr\xE8s long titre qui prend de la place}
+
+\subtitle {ne compl\xE9ter que si l'article poss\xE8de un sous-titre}
+
+\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs)
+{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}}
+% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils appara\xEEtrons dans l'article
+% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations
+% diff\xE9rentes.
+
+\institute[Universit\xE9s de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais g\xE9n\xE9ralement n\xE9cessaire)
+{
+ \inst{1}%
+ D\xE9partement d'Informatique\\
+ Universit\xE9 de Quelque Part
+ \and
+ \inst{2}%
+ D\xE9partement de Philosophie Th\xE9orique\\
+ Universit\xE9 d'Ailleurs}
+% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations
+% - Fa\xEEtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'int\xE9resse \xE0 votre adresse
+
+\date[CFP 2006] % (facultatif, peut \xEAtre une abr\xE9viation du nom de la conf\xE9rence)
+{Conf\xE9rence sur les Fantastiques Pr\xE9sentations, 2006}
+% - Utilisez \xE0 la fois le nom de la conf\xE9rence et son abr\xE9viation.
+% - N'a pas r\xE9ellement d'importance pour l'assistance qui sera pr\xE9sente lors de la conf\xE9rence,
+% mais en a surtout pour les personnes (y compris vous-m\xEAme) qui liront les transparents en ligne.
+
+\subject{La th\xE9orie de l'Informatique}
+% Ins\xE9r\xE9 uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut \xEAtre
+% supprim\xE9.
+
+
+
+% Si vous avez un fichier nomm\xE9 "universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier.xxx", o\xF9 xxx
+% est un format graphique accept\xE9 par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png),
+% alors vous pouvez ins\xE9rer votre logo ainsi :
+
+% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier}
+% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}}
+
+
+
+% \xC0 supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des mati\xE8res apparaisse
+% au d\xE9but de chaque sous-section :
+
+\AtBeginSubsection[] {
+ \begin{frame}<beamer>{Lignes directrices}
+ \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
+ \end{frame}
+}
+
+% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un \xE0 un,
+% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel
+% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) :
+
+%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \titlepage
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices}
+ \tableofcontents
+ % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections]
+\end{frame}
+
+
+% Structurer l'entretien est une t\xE2che difficile et la structure suivante
+% pourrait ne pas convenir. Voici quelques r\xE8gles \xE0 appliquer pour cet
+% exemple ci :
+
+% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des mati\xE8res).
+% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section
+% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il
+% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant \xE9t\xE9 comment\xE9s.
+
+% - Le public d'une conf\xE9rence conna\xEEtra probablement peu de chose sur le sujet
+% que vous serez en train de traiter. Donc, *simplifiez* !
+% - Dans un expos\xE9 de 20 minutes, garder \xE0 l'esprit les id\xE9es principales est largement
+% suffisant pour votre assistance. Laissez tomber certains d\xE9tails, m\xEAme s'ils vous
+% semblent n\xE9cessaires.
+% - Si vous omettez un d\xE9tail qui est vital pour une preuve/mise en oeuvre,
+% dites le simplement une fois. Ce sera suffisant pour tout le monde.
+
+\section{Motivation}
+
+\subsection{Le probl\xE8me \xE9tudi\xE9}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.}
+ % - Le titre doit r\xE9sumer le transparent dans un langage compr\xE9hensible
+ % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} \xE0 volont\xE9.
+ \item Utilisez des phrases tr\xE8s courtes et de courtes expressions.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent}
+
+ Vous pouvez cr\xE9er des recouvrements\dots
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} :
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Premier item.
+ \pause
+ \item
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ en utilisant les sp\xE9cifications des recouvrements
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<3->
+ Premier item.
+ \item<4->
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ en utilisant en g\xE9n\xE9ral la commande \texttt{uncover} :
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \uncover<5->{\item
+ Premier item.}
+ \uncover<6->{\item
+ Second item.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Travail pr\xE9alable}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super !
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment g\xE9nial !
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section{Nos r\xE9sultats/contribution}
+
+\subsection{Principaux r\xE9sultats}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ {\scshape Beamer} poss\xE8dent plusieurs th\xE8mes diff\xE9rents...
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ Merci \xE0 Till Tantau pour {\scshape Beamer} et son manuel.
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ Toute la puissance de \LaTeX{} pour cr\xE9er des pr\xE9sentations.
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Id\xE9es de bases pour les preuves}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ Une id\xE9e...
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ Une autre...
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ Et une derni\xE8re...
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section*{R\xE9sum\xE9}
+
+\begin{frame}{R\xE9sum\xE9}
+
+ % Fa\xEEtes un r\xE9sum\xE9 *tr\xE8s court*.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
+ deux.
+ \item
+ Le \alert{deuxi\xE8me message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
+ deux.
+ \item
+ Peut-\xEAtre un \alert{troisi\xE8me message}, mais pas plus que \xE7a.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives.
+ \vskip0pt plus.5fill
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Perspectives
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
+ \item
+ Autre probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+% Tout ce qui suit est facultatif et n'est typiquement pas n\xE9cessaire.
+\appendix
+\section<presentation>*{\appendixname}
+\subsection<presentation>*{Lectures compl\xE9mentaires}
+
+\begin{frame}[allowframebreaks]
+ \frametitle<presentation>{Lectures compl\xE9mentaires}
+
+ \begin{thebibliography}{10}
+
+ \beamertemplatebookbibitems
+ % Commencer avec des livres (image d'un livre ins\xE9r\xE9e)
+
+ \bibitem{Auteur1990}
+ A.~Auteur.
+ \newblock {\em Livre de quelque chose}.
+ \newblock Une Edition, 1990.
+
+
+ \beamertemplatearticlebibitems
+ % Et continuer avec les articles (image d'un article incluse). Fa\xEEtes une liste br\xE8ve.
+
+ \bibitem{Quelqu'un2000}
+ S.~Quelqu'un.
+ \newblock Et ceci et cela.
+ \newblock {\em Journal de ceci et cela}, 2(1):50--100,
+ 2000.
+ \end{thebibliography}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,226 @@
+% $Header$
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% Diese Datei enth\xE4lt eine L\xF6sungsvorlage f\xFCr:
+
+
+% - Vortr\xE4ge \xFCber ein beliebiges Thema.
+% - Vortragsl\xE4nge zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten.
+% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschn\xF6rkelt/dekorativ.
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
+% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
+% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
+% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
+% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
+% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
+% notice.
+
+
+
+\mode<presentation>
+{
+ \usetheme{Warsaw}
+ % oder ...
+
+ \setbeamercovered{transparent}
+ % oder auch nicht
+}
+
+
+\usepackage[german]{babel}
+% oder was auch immer
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% oder was auch immer
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen
+% m\xFCssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile
+% mit fontenc zu l\xF6schen.
+
+
+\title[Kurzversion des Titels] % (optional, nur bei langen Titeln n\xF6tig)
+{Titel}
+
+\subtitle
+{Untertitel} % (optional)
+
+\author[Autor, Anders] % (optional, nur bei vielen Autoren)
+{F.~Autor\inst{1} \and S.~Anders\inst{2}}
+% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
+% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
+
+\institute[Universit\xE4ten Hier und Dort] % (optional, aber oft n\xF6tig)
+{
+ \inst{1}%
+ Institut f\xFCr Informatik\\
+ Universit\xE4t Hier
+ \and
+ \inst{2}%
+ Institut f\xFCr theoretische Philosophie\\
+ Universit\xE4t Dort}
+% - Der \inst{?} Befehl sollte nur verwendet werden, wenn die Autoren
+% unterschiedlichen Instituten angeh\xF6ren.
+% - Keep it simple, niemand interessiert sich f\xFCr die genau Adresse.
+
+\date[Kurzversion des Anlass] % (optional)
+{Datum / Anlass}
+
+
+\subject{Informatik}
+% Dies wird lediglich in den PDF Informationskatalog einf\xFCgt. Kann gut
+% weggelassen werden.
+
+
+% Falls eine Logodatei namens "university-logo-filename.xxx" vorhanden
+% ist, wobei xxx ein von latex bzw. pdflatex lesbares Graphikformat
+% ist, so kann man wie folgt ein Logo einf\xFCgen:
+
+% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
+% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
+
+
+
+% Folgendes sollte gel\xF6scht werden, wenn man nicht am Anfang jedes
+% Unterabschnitts die Gliederung nochmal sehen m\xF6chte.
+\AtBeginSubsection[]
+{
+ \begin{frame}<beamer>{Gliederung}
+ \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
+ \end{frame}
+}
+
+
+% Falls Aufz\xE4hlungen immer schrittweise gezeigt werden sollen, kann
+% folgendes Kommando benutzt werden:
+
+%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
+
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \titlepage
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Gliederung}
+ \tableofcontents
+ % Die Option [pausesections] k\xF6nnte n\xFCtzlich sein.
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+% Da dies ein Vorlage f\xFCr beliebige Vortr\xE4ge ist, lassen sich kaum
+% allgemeine Regeln zur Strukturierung angeben. Da die Vorlage f\xFCr
+% einen Vortrag zwischen 15 und 45 Minuten gedacht ist, f\xE4hrt man aber
+% mit folgenden Regeln oft gut.
+
+% - Es sollte genau zwei oder drei Abschnitte geben (neben der
+% Zusammenfassung).
+% - *H\xF6chstens* drei Unterabschnitte pro Abschnitt.
+% - Pro Rahmen sollte man zwischen 30s und 2min reden. Es sollte also
+% 15 bis 30 Rahmen geben.
+
+
+
+\section{Einleitung}
+
+\subsection[Kurzversion des ersten Unterabschnittstitels]
+{Erster Unterabschnittstitel}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.\\
+ Korrekte Gro\xDF-/Kleinschreibung beachten.}{Untertitel sind optional.}
+ % - Eine \xDCberschrift fasst einen Rahmen verst\xE4ndlich zusammen. Man
+ % muss sie verstehen k\xF6nnen, selbst wenn man nicht den Rest des
+ % Rahmens versteht.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Viel \texttt{itemize} benutzen.
+ \item
+ Sehr kurze S\xE4tze oder Satzglieder verwenden.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+
+ Man kann Overlays erzeugen\dots
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item mit dem \texttt{pause}-Befehl:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Erster Punkt.
+ \pause
+ \item
+ Zweiter Punkt.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ mittels Overlay-Spezifikationen:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<3->
+ Erster Punkt.
+ \item<4->
+ Zweiter Punkt.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ mit dem allgemeinen \texttt{uncover}-Befehl:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \uncover<5->{\item
+ Erster Punkt.}
+ \uncover<6->{\item
+ Zweiter Punkt.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Zweiter Unterabschnittstitel}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{\xDCberschriften m\xFCssen informativ sein.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\section*{Zusammenfassung}
+
+\begin{frame}{Zusammenfassung}
+
+ % Die Zusammenfassung sollte sehr kurz sein.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Die \alert{erste Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
+ \item
+ Die \alert{zweite Hauptbotschaft} des Vortrags in ein bis zwei Zeilen.
+ \item
+ Eventuell noch eine \alert{dritte Botschaft}, aber nicht noch mehr.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ % Der folgende Ausblick ist optional.
+ \vskip0pt plus.5fill
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Ausblick
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Etwas, was wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
+ \item
+ Nochwas, das wir noch nicht l\xF6sen konnten.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.de.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+% $Header$
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% This file is a solution template for:
+
+% - Giving a talk on some subject.
+% - The talk is between 15min and 45min long.
+% - Style is ornate.
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
+% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
+% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
+% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
+% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
+% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
+% notice.
+
+
+\mode<presentation>
+{
+ \usetheme{Warsaw}
+ % or ...
+
+ \setbeamercovered{transparent}
+ % or whatever (possibly just delete it)
+}
+
+
+\usepackage[english]{babel}
+% or whatever
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% or whatever
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1
+% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc.
+
+
+\title[Short Paper Title] % (optional, use only with long paper titles)
+{Presentation Title}
+
+\subtitle
+{Presentation Subtitle} % (optional)
+
+\author[Author, Another] % (optional, use only with lots of authors)
+{F.~Author\inst{1} \and S.~Another\inst{2}}
+% - Use the \inst{?} command only if the authors have different
+% affiliation.
+
+\institute[Universities of Somewhere and Elsewhere] % (optional, but mostly needed)
+{
+ \inst{1}%
+ Department of Computer Science\\
+ University of Somewhere
+ \and
+ \inst{2}%
+ Department of Theoretical Philosophy\\
+ University of Elsewhere}
+% - Use the \inst command only if there are several affiliations.
+% - Keep it simple, no one is interested in your street address.
+
+\date[Short Occasion] % (optional)
+{Date / Occasion}
+
+\subject{Talks}
+% This is only inserted into the PDF information catalog. Can be left
+% out.
+
+
+
+% If you have a file called "university-logo-filename.xxx", where xxx
+% is a graphic format that can be processed by latex or pdflatex,
+% resp., then you can add a logo as follows:
+
+% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{university-logo}{university-logo-filename}
+% \logo{\pgfuseimage{university-logo}}
+
+
+
+% Delete this, if you do not want the table of contents to pop up at
+% the beginning of each subsection:
+\AtBeginSubsection[]
+{
+ \begin{frame}<beamer>{Outline}
+ \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
+ \end{frame}
+}
+
+
+% If you wish to uncover everything in a step-wise fashion, uncomment
+% the following command:
+
+%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \titlepage
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Outline}
+ \tableofcontents
+ % You might wish to add the option [pausesections]
+\end{frame}
+
+
+% Since this a solution template for a generic talk, very little can
+% be said about how it should be structured. However, the talk length
+% of between 15min and 45min and the theme suggest that you stick to
+% the following rules:
+
+% - Exactly two or three sections (other than the summary).
+% - At *most* three subsections per section.
+% - Talk about 30s to 2min per frame. So there should be between about
+% 15 and 30 frames, all told.
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+\subsection[Short First Subsection Name]{First Subsection Name}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative. Use Uppercase Letters.}{Subtitles are optional.}
+ % - A title should summarize the slide in an understandable fashion
+ % for anyone how does not follow everything on the slide itself.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Use \texttt{itemize} a lot.
+ \item
+ Use very short sentences or short phrases.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+
+ You can create overlays\dots
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item using the \texttt{pause} command:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ First item.
+ \pause
+ \item
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ using overlay specifications:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<3->
+ First item.
+ \item<4->
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ using the general \texttt{uncover} command:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \uncover<5->{\item
+ First item.}
+ \uncover<6->{\item
+ Second item.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Second Subsection}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Make Titles Informative.}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section*{Summary}
+
+\begin{frame}{Summary}
+
+ % Keep the summary *very short*.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ The \alert{first main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
+ \item
+ The \alert{second main message} of your talk in one or two lines.
+ \item
+ Perhaps a \alert{third message}, but not more than that.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ % The following outlook is optional.
+ \vskip0pt plus.5fill
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Outlook
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Something you haven't solved.
+ \item
+ Something else you haven't solved.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.en.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,221 @@
+% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour :
+
+% - donner un expos\xE9 sur un certain sujet
+% - une dur\xE9e variant de 15 \xE0 45 minutes
+% - un style ornemental.
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa <philippejjg at free.fr>
+%
+% En principe, ce fichier peut \xEAtre redistribu\xE9 et/ou modifi\xE9 conform\xE9ment
+% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% Cependant, ce fichier est suppos\xE9 comme \xE9tant un "exemple-type" qui
+% peut \xEAtre modifi\xE9 selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si
+% vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu' "exemple-type" et non
+% sp\xE9cifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un package ou
+% programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier
+% librement et de modifier ce fichier et m\xEAme d'effacer ce message de
+% copyright.
+
+
+
+\mode<presentation> {
+ \usetheme{Warsaw}
+ % ou autre ...
+
+ \setbeamercovered{transparent}
+ % ou autre chose (il est \xE9galement possible de supprimer cette ligne)
+}
+
+
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel}
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% or autre
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent \xEAtre assortis. Si T1
+% ne para\xEEt pas tr\xE8s esth\xE9tique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc.
+
+
+\title[Titre court] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser uniquement si le titre de l'article est trop long)
+{Tr\xE8s long titre qui prend de la place}
+
+\subtitle {Sous-titre de la pr\xE9sentation}
+
+\author[Auteur, Lautre] % (facultatif, \xE0 utiliser seulement avec plusieurs auteurs)
+{F.~Auteur\inst{1} \and S.~Lautre\inst{2}}
+% - Composez les noms dans l'ordre dans lequel ils appara\xEEtrons dans l'article
+% - Utilisez la commande \inst{?} uniquement si les auteurs ont des affiliations
+% diff\xE9rentes.
+
+\institute[Universit\xE9s de Quelque Part et d'Ailleurs] % (facultatif mais g\xE9n\xE9ralement n\xE9cessaire)
+{
+ \inst{1}%
+ D\xE9partement d'Informatique\\
+ Universit\xE9 de Quelque Part
+ \and
+ \inst{2}%
+ D\xE9partement de Philosophie Th\xE9orique\\
+ Universit\xE9 d'Ailleurs}
+% - Utilisez la commande \inst uniquement s'il y a plusieurs affectations
+% - Fa\xEEtes quelque chose de simple, personne ne s'int\xE9resse \xE0 votre adresse.
+
+\date[Version courte] % (facultatif)
+{Date / Occasion}
+
+\subject{Expos\xE9}
+% Ins\xE9r\xE9 uniquement dans la page d'information du fichier PDF. Peut \xEAtre
+% supprim\xE9.
+
+
+
+% Si vous avez un fichier nomm\xE9 "universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier.xxx", o\xF9 xxx
+% est un format graphique accept\xE9 par latex ou pdflatex (comme par exemple .png),
+% alors vous pouvez ins\xE9rer votre logo ainsi :
+
+% \pgfdeclareimage[height=0.5cm]{le-logo}{universit\xE9-logo-nomfichier}
+% \logo{\pgfuseimage{le-logo}}
+
+
+
+% \xC0 supprimer si vous ne voulez pas que la table des mati\xE8res apparaisse
+% au d\xE9but de chaque sous-section :
+
+\AtBeginSubsection[] {
+ \begin{frame}<beamer>{Lignes directrices}
+ \tableofcontents[currentsection,currentsubsection]
+ \end{frame}
+}
+
+
+% Si vous souhaitez recouvrir vos transparents un \xE0 un,
+% utilisez la commande suivante (pour plus d'info, voir la page 74 du manuel
+% d'utilisation de Beamer (version 3.06) par Till Tantau) :
+
+%\beamerdefaultoverlayspecification{<+->}
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}
+ \titlepage
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Lignes directrices}
+ \tableofcontents
+ % Vous pouvez, si vous le souhaiter ajouter l'option [pausesections]
+\end{frame}
+
+
+% Puisqu'il s'agit d'un exemple-type pour un expos\xE9 d'ordre g\xE9n\xE9ral, peu de choses
+% peuvent \xEAtre dites concernant sa structure. Cependant, la dur\xE9e varie de 15 minutes
+% \xE0 45 minutes et le th\xE8me vous sugg\xE8re de suivre les r\xE8gles suivantes :
+
+% - Avoir exactement deux ou trois sections (autre que la table des mati\xE8res).
+% - Tout au plus trois sous-sections par section
+% - Parlez approximativement entre 30 secondes et 2 minutes par transparent. Il
+% devrait donc y avoir entre 15 et 30 transparents, tous ayant \xE9t\xE9 comment\xE9s.
+
+\section{Introduction}
+
+\subsection[Court titre s-section]{Un tr\xE8s long titre de sous-section.}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}{Les sous-titres sont facultatifs.}
+ % - Le titre doit r\xE9sumer le transparent dans un langage compr\xE9hensible
+ % par tous ceux qui ne suivront rien de ce qu'il y a sur ce transparent.
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item Utilisez \texttt{itemize} \xE0 volont\xE9.
+ \item Utilisez des phrases tr\xE8s courtes et de courtes expressions.
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent}
+
+ Vous pouvez cr\xE9er des recouvrements\dots
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item en utilisant la commande \texttt{pause} :
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Premier item.
+ \pause
+ \item
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ en utilisant les sp\xE9cifications des recouvrements
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item<3->
+ Premier item.
+ \item<4->
+ Second item.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ en utilisant en g\xE9n\xE9ral la commande \texttt{uncover} :
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \uncover<5->{\item
+ Premier item.}
+ \uncover<6->{\item
+ Second item.}
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\subsection{Deuxi\xE8me sous-section}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment super !
+\end{frame}
+
+\begin{frame}{Fa\xEEtes des titres qui informent.}
+
+ {\scshape Beamer}, c'est vraiment g\xE9nial !
+\end{frame}
+
+
+
+\section*{R\xE9sum\xE9}
+
+\begin{frame}{R\xE9sum\xE9}
+
+ % Fa\xEEtes un r\xE9sum\xE9 *tr\xE8s court*.
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Le \alert{premier message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
+ deux.
+ \item
+ Le \alert{deuxi\xE8me message principal} de l'expos\xE9 en une ligne ou
+ deux.
+ \item
+ Peut-\xEAtre un \alert{troisi\xE8me message}, mais pas plus que \xE7a.
+ \end{itemize}
+
+ % Les perspectives suivantes sont facultatives.
+ \vskip0pt plus.5fill
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Perspectives
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
+ \item
+ Autre probl\xE8me non r\xE9solu.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/generic-talks/generic-ornate-15min-45min.fr.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+% $Header$
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% Diese Datei enth\xE4lt eine L\xF6sungsvorlage f\xFCr:
+
+% - Das Vorstellen des n\xE4chsten Sprechers.
+% - Vortragsl\xE4nge von ca. zwei Minuten.
+% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschn\xF6rkelt/dekorativ.
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
+% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
+% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
+% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
+% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
+% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
+% notice.
+
+
+\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25]
+% Oder was auch immer.
+
+\usetheme{Warsaw}
+\setbeamertemplate{headline}{}
+\setbeamertemplate{footline}{}
+\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm}
+
+\usepackage[german]{babel}
+% Oder was auch immer
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% Oder was auch immer
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen
+% m\xFCssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile
+% mit fontenc zu l\xF6schen.
+
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}{Name der/des Vortragenden}{\xDCber unsere(n) n\xE4chste(n) Vortragende(n)}
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Derzeitige Stellung(en) von Name der/des Vortragenden
+
+ % Beispiele:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Professor f\xFCr Mathematik, Universit\xE4t Irgendwo.
+ \item
+ Juniorpartner bei Firma X.
+ \item
+ Sprecher der Organisation X / des Projekts X.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ Erfahrungen und Erfolge
+ % Optional. Sollte nur gebracht werden, wenn es angemessen
+ % erscheint, dem Vortragenden leicht zu schmeicheln; was
+ % beispielsweise bei eingeladenen Vortragenden der Fall ist.
+ % Die Unterpunkte sollten den Sprecher interessant und kompetent
+ % erscheinen lassen.
+
+ % Beispiele:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Falls passend, akademischer Grad
+ \item
+ Derzeitige und/oder vorherige Stellungen, eventuell mit Daten
+ \item
+ Publikationen (eventuell lediglich die Anzahl)
+ \item
+ Auszeichnungen, Preise
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ In Bezug auf den heutigen Vortrag
+ % Optional. Sollte benutzt werden, um spezielle Erfahrungen /
+ % spezielles Wissen des Vortragenen speziell in Bezug auf den
+ % Vortrag aufzuzeigen -- falls diese Erfahrungen sich nicht
+ % bereits aus obigen Punkten ableiten lassen.
+
+ % Beispiele:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Expertin/Experte, die/der seit X Monaten/Jahren in dem
+ Gebiet/Projekt arbeitet.
+ \item
+ Wird ihre/seine Forschung / die Forschung der Gruppe/Firma vorstellen.
+ \item
+ Wird einen Projektbericht/Projektstatus vorstellen.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+% $Header$
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% This file is a solution template for:
+
+% - Introducing another speaker.
+% - Talk length is about 2min.
+% - Style is ornate.
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
+% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
+% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
+% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
+% package/program, the author grants the extra permission to freely
+% copy and modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this
+% copyright notice.
+
+
+\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25]
+% or whatever
+
+\usetheme{Warsaw}
+\setbeamertemplate{headline}{}
+\setbeamertemplate{footline}{}
+\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm}
+
+\usepackage[english]{babel}
+% or whatever
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% or whatever
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1
+% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc.
+
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}{Speaker's Name}{About Our Next Speaker}
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Current affiliation of Speaker's Name
+
+ % Examples:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Professor of mathematics, University of Wherever.
+ \item
+ Junior partner at company X.
+ \item
+ Speaker for organization/project X.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ Experience and achievements
+ % Optional. Use this if it is appropriate to slightly flatter the
+ % speaker, for example if the speaker has been invited.
+ % Using subitems, list things that make the speaker look
+ % interesting and competent.
+
+ % Examples:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Academic degree, but only if appropriate
+ \item
+ Current and/or previous positions, possibly with dates
+ \item
+ Publications (possibly just number of publications)
+ \item
+ Awards, prizes
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ Concerning today's talk
+ % Optional. Use this to point out specific experiences/knowledge
+ % of the speaker that are important for the talk and that do not
+ % follow from the above.
+
+ % Examples:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Expert who has worked in the field/project for X month/years.
+ \item
+ Will present his/her/group's/company's research on the subject.
+ \item
+ Will summarize project report or current project status.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
+
+
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Added: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex (rev 0)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa
+
+\documentclass{beamer}
+
+% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour :
+
+% - Introduire un autre conf\xE9rencier
+% - une dur\xE9e de parole d'approximativement 2 minutes
+% - un style ornemental
+
+
+
+% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
+%
+% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa <philippejjg at free.fr>
+%
+% En principe, ce fichier peut \xEAtre redistribu\xE9 et/ou modifi\xE9 conform\xE9ment
+% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2.
+%
+% Cependant, ce fichier est suppos\xE9 comme \xE9tant un "exemple-type" qui peut \xEAtre modifi\xE9
+% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu'
+% "exemple-type" et non sp\xE9cifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un
+% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et
+% de modifier ce fichier et m\xEAme d'effacer ce message de copyright.
+
+
+\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical
+shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25]
+% ou autre
+
+\usetheme{Warsaw}
+\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} \setbeamertemplate{footline}{}
+\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm}
+
+\usepackage[french]{babel}
+% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel}
+
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+% or autre
+
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent \xEAtre assortis. Si T1
+% ne para\xEEt pas tr\xE8s esth\xE9tique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc.
+
+
+
+\begin{document}
+
+\begin{frame}{Nom du conf\xE9rencier}{\xC0 propos du conf\xE9rencier suivant}
+
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Affiliation actuelle du conf\xE9rencier
+
+ % Exemples:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Professeur de Math\xE9matiques, Universit\xE9 de Quelque Part.
+ \item
+ Partenaire Junior de la Compagnie X
+ \item
+ Conf\xE9rencier pour l'organisation/le projet X.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ Exp\xE9rience et r\xE9alisation
+ % Facultatif. Utilisez ceci s'il est appropri\xE9 de flatt\xE9 l\xE9g\xE8rement le
+ % conf\xE9rencier ; par exemple, s'il s'agit d'un invit\xE9.
+ % En utilisant des sous-item, la liste des choses faites par le conf\xE9rencier
+ % para\xEEt int\xE9ressante et suffisante.
+
+ % Exemples:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Dipl\xF4me d'Acad\xE9mie, mais uniquement si c'est appropri\xE9
+ \item
+ Positions actuelles ou futures, \xE9ventuellement avec les dates
+ \item
+ Publications (\xE9ventuellement juste le nombre de publications)
+ \item
+ R\xE9compenses, prix
+ \end{itemize}
+ \item
+ Concernant le sujet d'aujourd'hui
+ % Facultatif. Il est important pour l'expos\xE9 d'utiliser ce point en dehors des toutes
+ % exp\xE9riences/connaissances sp\xE9cifiques du conf\xE9rencier et de ne pas poursuivre ce qui
+ % a \xE9t\xE9 indiqu\xE9 plus haut.
+
+ % Exemples:
+ \begin{itemize}
+ \item
+ Expert qui a travaill\xE9 sur le projet durant X mois/ann\xE9e.
+ \item
+ Va pr\xE9senter les recherches de son groupe/sa compagnie sur le
+ sujet.
+ \item
+ Va r\xE9sumer le rapport du projet ou le statut actuel du projet.
+ \end{itemize}
+ \end{itemize}
+\end{frame}
+
+\end{document}
Property changes on: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/solutions/short-talks/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex
___________________________________________________________________
Added: svn:eol-style
## -0,0 +1 ##
+native
\ No newline at end of property
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.de.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,106 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% Diese Datei enth\xE4lt eine L\xF6sungsvorlage f\xFCr:
-
-% - Das Vorstellen des n\xE4chsten Sprechers.
-% - Vortragsl\xE4nge von ca. zwei Minuten.
-% - Aussehen des Vortrags ist verschn\xF6rkelt/dekorativ.
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
-% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
-% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
-% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
-% package/program, I grant the extra permission to freely copy and
-% modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this copyright
-% notice.
-
-
-\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25]
-% Oder was auch immer.
-
-\usetheme{Warsaw}
-\setbeamertemplate{headline}{}
-\setbeamertemplate{footline}{}
-\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm}
-
-\usepackage[german]{babel}
-% Oder was auch immer
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% Oder was auch immer
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Oder was auch immer. Zu beachten ist, das Font und Encoding passen
-% m\xFCssen. Falls T1 nicht funktioniert, kann man versuchen, die Zeile
-% mit fontenc zu l\xF6schen.
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}{Name der/des Vortragenden}{\xDCber unsere(n) n\xE4chste(n) Vortragende(n)}
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Derzeitige Stellung(en) von Name der/des Vortragenden
-
- % Beispiele:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Professor f\xFCr Mathematik, Universit\xE4t Irgendwo.
- \item
- Juniorpartner bei Firma X.
- \item
- Sprecher der Organisation X / des Projekts X.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- Erfahrungen und Erfolge
- % Optional. Sollte nur gebracht werden, wenn es angemessen
- % erscheint, dem Vortragenden leicht zu schmeicheln; was
- % beispielsweise bei eingeladenen Vortragenden der Fall ist.
- % Die Unterpunkte sollten den Sprecher interessant und kompetent
- % erscheinen lassen.
-
- % Beispiele:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Falls passend, akademischer Grad
- \item
- Derzeitige und/oder vorherige Stellungen, eventuell mit Daten
- \item
- Publikationen (eventuell lediglich die Anzahl)
- \item
- Auszeichnungen, Preise
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- In Bezug auf den heutigen Vortrag
- % Optional. Sollte benutzt werden, um spezielle Erfahrungen /
- % spezielles Wissen des Vortragenen speziell in Bezug auf den
- % Vortrag aufzuzeigen -- falls diese Erfahrungen sich nicht
- % bereits aus obigen Punkten ableiten lassen.
-
- % Beispiele:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Expertin/Experte, die/der seit X Monaten/Jahren in dem
- Gebiet/Projekt arbeitet.
- \item
- Wird ihre/seine Forschung / die Forschung der Gruppe/Firma vorstellen.
- \item
- Wird einen Projektbericht/Projektstatus vorstellen.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.en.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-% $Header$
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% This file is a solution template for:
-
-% - Introducing another speaker.
-% - Talk length is about 2min.
-% - Style is ornate.
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% In principle, this file can be redistributed and/or modified under
-% the terms of the GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% However, this file is supposed to be a template to be modified
-% for your own needs. For this reason, if you use this file as a
-% template and not specifically distribute it as part of a another
-% package/program, the author grants the extra permission to freely
-% copy and modify this file as you see fit and even to delete this
-% copyright notice.
-
-
-\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25]
-% or whatever
-
-\usetheme{Warsaw}
-\setbeamertemplate{headline}{}
-\setbeamertemplate{footline}{}
-\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm}
-
-\usepackage[english]{babel}
-% or whatever
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% or whatever
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Or whatever. Note that the encoding and the font should match. If T1
-% does not look nice, try deleting the line with the fontenc.
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}{Speaker's Name}{About Our Next Speaker}
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Current affiliation of Speaker's Name
-
- % Examples:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Professor of mathematics, University of Wherever.
- \item
- Junior partner at company X.
- \item
- Speaker for organization/project X.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- Experience and achievements
- % Optional. Use this if it is appropriate to slightly flatter the
- % speaker, for example if the speaker has been invited.
- % Using subitems, list things that make the speaker look
- % interesting and competent.
-
- % Examples:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Academic degree, but only if appropriate
- \item
- Current and/or previous positions, possibly with dates
- \item
- Publications (possibly just number of publications)
- \item
- Awards, prizes
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- Concerning today's talk
- % Optional. Use this to point out specific experiences/knowledge
- % of the speaker that are important for the talk and that do not
- % follow from the above.
-
- % Examples:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Expert who has worked in the field/project for X month/years.
- \item
- Will present his/her/group's/company's research on the subject.
- \item
- Will summarize project report or current project status.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
-
-
Deleted: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/beamer/speaker_introduction-ornate-2min.fr.tex 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-% /solutions/conference-talks/conference-ornate-20min.fr.tex, 22/02/2006 De Sousa
-
-\documentclass{beamer}
-
-% Ce fichier est un exemple-type pour :
-
-% - Introduire un autre conf\xE9rencier
-% - une dur\xE9e de parole d'approximativement 2 minutes
-% - un style ornemental
-
-
-
-% Copyright 2004 by Till Tantau <tantau at users.sourceforge.net>.
-%
-% Traduction de Philippe De Sousa <philippejjg at free.fr>
-%
-% En principe, ce fichier peut \xEAtre redistribu\xE9 et/ou modifi\xE9 conform\xE9ment
-% aux termes de la GNU Public License, version 2.
-%
-% Cependant, ce fichier est suppos\xE9 comme \xE9tant un "exemple-type" qui peut \xEAtre modifi\xE9
-% selon vos propres besoins. Pour cette raison, si vous utilisez ce fichier en tant qu'
-% "exemple-type" et non sp\xE9cifiquement pour le distribuer en tant que partie d'un
-% package ou programme, je vous donne la permission exceptionnelle de copier librement et
-% de modifier ce fichier et m\xEAme d'effacer ce message de copyright.
-
-
-\setbeamertemplate{background canvas}[vertical
-shading][bottom=white,top=structure.fg!25]
-% ou autre
-
-\usetheme{Warsaw}
-\setbeamertemplate{headline}{} \setbeamertemplate{footline}{}
-\setbeamersize{text margin left=0.5cm}
-
-\usepackage[french]{babel}
-% or autre comme par exemple \usepackage[english]{babel}
-
-\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% or autre
-
-\usepackage{times}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% Or autre. Notez que le codage et la fonte doivent \xEAtre assortis. Si T1
-% ne para\xEEt pas tr\xE8s esth\xE9tique, essayer d'effacer la ligne contenant fontenc.
-
-
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\begin{frame}{Nom du conf\xE9rencier}{\xC0 propos du conf\xE9rencier suivant}
-
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Affiliation actuelle du conf\xE9rencier
-
- % Exemples:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Professeur de Math\xE9matiques, Universit\xE9 de Quelque Part.
- \item
- Partenaire Junior de la Compagnie X
- \item
- Conf\xE9rencier pour l'organisation/le projet X.
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- Exp\xE9rience et r\xE9alisation
- % Facultatif. Utilisez ceci s'il est appropri\xE9 de flatt\xE9 l\xE9g\xE8rement le
- % conf\xE9rencier ; par exemple, s'il s'agit d'un invit\xE9.
- % En utilisant des sous-item, la liste des choses faites par le conf\xE9rencier
- % para\xEEt int\xE9ressante et suffisante.
-
- % Exemples:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Dipl\xF4me d'Acad\xE9mie, mais uniquement si c'est appropri\xE9
- \item
- Positions actuelles ou futures, \xE9ventuellement avec les dates
- \item
- Publications (\xE9ventuellement juste le nombre de publications)
- \item
- R\xE9compenses, prix
- \end{itemize}
- \item
- Concernant le sujet d'aujourd'hui
- % Facultatif. Il est important pour l'expos\xE9 d'utiliser ce point en dehors des toutes
- % exp\xE9riences/connaissances sp\xE9cifiques du conf\xE9rencier et de ne pas poursuivre ce qui
- % a \xE9t\xE9 indiqu\xE9 plus haut.
-
- % Exemples:
- \begin{itemize}
- \item
- Expert qui a travaill\xE9 sur le projet durant X mois/ann\xE9e.
- \item
- Va pr\xE9senter les recherches de son groupe/sa compagnie sur le
- sujet.
- \item
- Va r\xE9sumer le rapport du projet ou le statut actuel du projet.
- \end{itemize}
- \end{itemize}
-\end{frame}
-
-\end{document}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamer.cls 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
\ProvidesClass{beamer}
- [2019/07/23 v3.56 A class for typesetting presentations]
+ [2019/09/29 v3.57 A class for typesetting presentations]
% Setup modes and check for article option
% Also loads packages required by both beamer and beamerarticle
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerarticle.sty 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
% See the file doc/licenses/LICENSE for more details.
\ProvidesPackage{beamerarticle}
- [2019/07/23 v3.56 beamer input in article mode]
+ [2019/09/29 v3.57 beamer input in article mode]
% Setup modes and check for article option
% Also loads packages required by both beamer and beamerarticle
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbasecolor.sty 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -184,6 +184,7 @@
\ifdim\beamer at colbox@colseps>\z@\vskip\beamer at colbox@colseps\fi%
\fi%
\egroup\color at endgroup\egroup%
+ \wd\beamer at tempbox=\beamer at colbox@wd%
\ifx\beamer at colbox@ht\@empty\else\ht\beamer at tempbox=\beamer at colbox@ht\fi%
\ifx\beamer at colbox@dp\@empty\else\dp\beamer at tempbox=\beamer at colbox@dp\fi%
\ifbeamer at colbox@rounded%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerbaselocalstructure.sty 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@
\begin{actionenv}#2%
\def\insertblocktitle{#1}%
\par%
- \mode<presentation>{%\usebeamerfont{block}%
+ \only<presentation>{%\usebeamerfont{block}%
\setbeamercolor{local structure}{parent=alerted text}}%
\usebeamertemplate{block alerted begin}}
{\par%
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@
\begin{actionenv}#2%
\def\insertblocktitle{#1}%
\par%
- \mode<presentation>{%\usebeamerfont{block}%
+ \only<presentation>{%\usebeamerfont{block}%
\setbeamercolor{local structure}{parent=example text}}%
\usebeamertemplate{block example begin}}
{\par%
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerouterthemesplit.sty 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@
\usebeamerfont{author in head/foot}\insertshortauthor
\end{beamercolorbox}%
\begin{beamercolorbox}[wd=.5\paperwidth,ht=2.5ex,dp=1.125ex,leftskip=.3cm,rightskip=.3cm plus1fil]{title in head/foot}%
- \usebeamerfont{title in head/foot}\insertshorttitle\hfill\usebeamercolor[fg]{page number in head/foot}\usebeamerfont{page number in head/foot}\usebeamertemplate{page number in head/foot}
+ \usebeamerfont{title in head/foot}\insertshorttitle\nobreak\hfill\usebeamercolor[fg]{page number in head/foot}\usebeamerfont{page number in head/foot}\usebeamertemplate{page number in head/foot}
\end{beamercolorbox}}%
\vskip0pt%
}
Modified: trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty
===================================================================
--- trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty 2019-09-30 21:46:12 UTC (rev 52221)
+++ trunk/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/beamer/beamerpatchparalist.sty 2019-09-30 21:49:03 UTC (rev 52222)
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
\mode<presentation>
-\if at plnewitem
+\if at plnewenum
\def\enumerate{%
\ifnum \@enumdepth >\tw@
\@toodeep
@@ -42,6 +42,45 @@
\raggedright%
\beamer at firstlineitemizeunskip%
}
+\fi
+\def\compactenum{%
+ \ifnum \@enumdepth >\tw@
+ \@toodeep
+ \else
+ \advance\@enumdepth \@ne
+ \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
+ \advance\@itemdepth \@ne%
+ \fi
+ \def\@enum at widestlabel{7}%
+ \beamer at computepref\@enumdepth%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{\noexpand\usebeamertemplate{enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix item}}%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@cenum@}{\beamer at compactenum@}}
+\def\beamer@@cenum@[{\@ifnextchar<{\beamer at cenumdefault[}{\beamer@@@cenum@[}}
+\def\beamer at cenumdefault[#1]{\def\beamer at defaultospec{#1}%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@@cenum@}{\beamer at compactenum@}}
+\def\beamer@@@cenum@[#1]{\@enumlabel@{\beamer at compactenum@}[[#1]} % Here a token is gobbled in paralist package
+\def\beamer at compactenum@{%
+ \beamer at computepref\@itemdepth%
+ \usebeamerfont{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}%
+ \usebeamercolor[fg]{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}%
+ \@adjust at enum@labelwidth
+ \expandafter\list\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname{%
+ \usecounter{\@enumctr}%
+ \parsep\plparsep
+ \itemsep\plitemsep
+ \topsep\pltopsep
+ \partopsep\plpartopsep
+ \labelwidth
+ \csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@listdepth\endcsname
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel\enumlabel}%
+ \beamer at cramped%
+ \raggedright%
+ \beamer at firstlineitemizeunskip%
+}
+\def\endcompactenum{\ifhmode\par\fi\endlist}
+
+\if at plnewitem
\def\itemize{%
\ifnum \@itemdepth >\tw@
\@toodeep
@@ -71,6 +110,39 @@
\beamer at firstlineitemizeunskip%
}
\fi
+\def\compactitem{%
+ \ifnum \@itemdepth >\tw@
+ \@toodeep
+ \else
+ \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+ \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+ \fi
+ \beamer at computepref\@itemdepth%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\@itemitem\endcsname{\noexpand\usebeamertemplate{itemize \beameritemnestingprefix item}}%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@citem@}{\beamer at compactitem@}}%
+\def\beamer@@citem@[{\@ifnextchar<{\beamer at citemdefault[}{\beamer@@@citem@[}}
+\def\beamer at citemdefault[#1]{\def\beamer at defaultospec{#1}%
+ \@ifnextchar[{\beamer@@@citem@}{\beamer at compactitem@}}
+\def\beamer@@@citem@[#1]{\@itemlabel@{\beamer at compactitem@}[#1]}
+\def\beamer at compactitem@{%
+ \usebeamerfont{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}%
+ \usebeamercolor[fg]{itemize/enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix body}%
+ \@adjust at item@labelwidth
+ \expandafter\list\csname\@itemitem\endcsname{%
+ \parsep\plparsep
+ \itemsep\plitemsep
+ \topsep\pltopsep
+ \partopsep\plpartopsep
+ \labelwidth
+ \csname leftmargin\romannumeral\@listdepth\endcsname
+ \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+ \let\makelabel\itemlabel}%
+ \beamer at cramped%
+ \raggedright%
+ \beamer at firstlineitemizeunskip%
+}
+\def\endcompactitem{\ifhmode\par\fi\endlist}
+
\if at plflushright
\def\enumlabel#1{{\usebeamerfont*{enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix item}%
\usebeamercolor[fg]{enumerate \beameritemnestingprefix item}\hss#1}}
More information about the tex-live-commits
mailing list